# Patent

## Title
Systems and methods of RF power transmission, modulation, and amplification

## Abstract

Methods and systems for vector combining power amplification are disclosed herein. In one embodiment, a plurality of signals are individually amplified, then summed to form a desired time-varying complex envelope signal. Phase and/or frequency characteristics of one or more of the signals are controlled to provide the desired phase, frequency, and/or amplitude characteristics of the desired time-varying complex envelope signal. In another embodiment, a time-varying complex envelope signal is decomposed into a plurality of constant envelope constituent signals. The constituent signals are amplified equally or substantially equally, and then summed to construct an amplified version of the original time-varying envelope signal. Embodiments also perform frequency up-conversion.

## Background
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/216,163, filed Jun. 30, 2008, now allowed, titled “Systems and Methods of RF Power Transmission, Modulation and Amplification,” which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/929,450, filed Jun. 28, 2007, and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/929,585, filed Jul. 3, 2007, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. The present application is related to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/256,172, filed Oct. 24, 2005, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,184,723 and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/508,989 filed Aug. 24, 2006, both of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.


BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
1. Field of the Invention
The present invention relates generally to RF power transmission, modulation, and amplification. More particularly, the invention relates to methods and systems for vector combining power amplification.
2. Background Art
In power amplifiers, a complex tradeoff typically exists between linearity and power efficiency.
Linearity is determined by a power amplifier's operating range on a characteristic curve that relates its input to output variables—the more linear the operating range the more linear the power amplifier is said to be. Linearity is a desired characteristic of a power amplifier. In one aspect, for example, it is desired that a power amplifier uniformly amplifies signals of varying amplitude, and/or phase and/or frequency. Accordingly, linearity is an important determiner of the output signal quality of a power amplifier.
Power efficiency can be calculated using the relationship of the total power delivered to a load divided by the total power supplied to the amplifier. For an ideal amplifier, power efficiency is 100%. Typically, power amplifiers are divided into classes which determine the amplifier's maximum theoretical power efficiency. Power efficiency is clearly a desired characteristic of a power amplifier—particularly, in wireless communication systems where power consumption is significantly dominated by the power amplifier.
Unfortunately, the traditional tradeoff between linearity and efficiency in power amplifiers is such that the more linear a power amplifier is the less power efficient it is. For example, the most linear amplifier is biased for class A operation, which is the least efficient class of amplifiers. On the other hand, higher class amplifiers such as class B, C, D, E, etc, are more power efficient, but are considerably non-linear which can result in spectrally distorted output signals.
The tradeoff described above is further accentuated by typical wireless communication signals. Wireless communication signals, such as OFDM, CDMA, and W-CDMA for example, are generally characterized by their peak-to-average power ratios. The larger the signal's peak to average ratio the more non-linear distortion will be produced when non-linear amplifiers are employed.
Outphasing amplification techniques have been proposed for RF amplifier designs. In several aspects, however, existing outphasing techniques are deficient in satisfying complex signal amplification requirements, particularly as defined by wireless communication standards, for example.
In one aspect, existing outphasing techniques employ an isolating and/or a combining element when combining constant envelope constituents of a desired output signal. For example, it is commonly the case that a power combiner is used to combine the constituent signals. This combining approach, however, typically results in a degradation of output signal power due to insertion loss and limited bandwidth, and, correspondingly, a decrease in power efficiency.
In another aspect, the typically large size of combining elements precludes having them in monolithic amplifier designs.
What is needed therefore are power amplification methods and systems that solve the deficiencies of existing power amplifying techniques while maximizing power efficiency and minimizing non-linear distortion. Further, power amplification methods and systems that can be implemented without the limitations of traditional power combining circuitry and techniques are needed.
BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
Embodiments for vector combining power amplification are disclosed herein.
In one embodiment, a plurality of substantially constant envelope signals are individually amplified, then combined to form a desired time-varying complex envelope signal. Phase and/or frequency characteristics of one or more of the signals are controlled to provide the desired phase, frequency, and/or amplitude characteristics of the desired time-varying complex envelope signal.
In another embodiment, a time-varying complex envelope signal is decomposed into a plurality of substantially constant envelope constituent signals. The constituent signals are amplified, and then re-combined to construct an amplified version of the original time-varying envelope signal.
Embodiments of the invention can be practiced with modulated carrier signals and with baseband information and clock signals. Embodiments of the invention also achieve frequency up-conversion. Accordingly, embodiments of the invention represent integrated solutions for frequency up-conversion, amplification, and modulation.
Embodiments of the invention can be implemented with analog and/or digital controls. The invention can be implemented with analog components or with a combination of analog components and digital components. In the latter embodiment, digital signal processing can be implemented in an existing baseband processor for added cost savings.
Additional features and advantages of the invention will be set forth in the description that follows. Yet further features and advantages will be apparent to a person skilled in the art based on the description set forth herein or may be learned by practice of the invention. The advantages of the invention will be realized and attained by the structure and methods particularly pointed out in the written description and claims hereof as well as the appended drawings.
It is to be understood that both the foregoing summary and the following detailed description are exemplary and explanatory and are intended to provide further explanation of embodiments of the invention as claimed.



BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
The application file contains at least one drawing executed in color. Copies of this patent application publication with color drawings will be provided by the Office upon request and payment of the necessary fee
Embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings, wherein generally like reference numbers indicate identical or functionally similar elements. Also, generally, the leftmost digit(s) of the reference numbers identify the drawings in which the associated elements are first introduced.
FIG. 1A is an example that illustrates the generation of an exemplary time-varying complex envelope signal.
FIG. 1B is another example that illustrates the generation of an exemplary time-varying complex envelope signal.
FIG. 1C is an example that illustrates the generation of an exemplary time-varying complex envelope signal from the sum of two or more constant envelope signals.
FIG. 1D illustrates the power amplification of an example time-varying complex envelope signal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 1E is a block diagram that illustrates a vector power amplification embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 1 illustrates a phasor representation of a signal.
FIG. 2 illustrates a phasor representation of a time-varying complex envelope signal.
FIGS. 3A-3C illustrate an example modulation to generate a time-varying complex envelope signal.
FIG. 3D is an example that illustrates constant envelope decomposition of a time-varying envelope signal.
FIG. 4 is a phasor diagram that illustrates a Cartesian 4-Branch Vector Power Amplification (VPA) method of an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment of the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 6 is a process flowchart embodiment for power amplification according to the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 7A is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier for implementing the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 7B is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier for implementing the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 8A is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier according to the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 8B is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier according to the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 8C is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier according to the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 8D is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier according to the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA method.
FIGS. 9A-9B are phasor diagrams that illustrate a Cartesian-Polar-Cartesian-Polar (CPCP) 2-Branch Vector Power Amplification (VPA) method of an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 10 is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment of the CPCP 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 10A is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of the CPCP 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 11 is a process flowchart embodiment for power amplification according to the CPCP 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 12 is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier for implementing the CPCP 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 12A is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier for implementing the CPCP 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 12B is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier for implementing the CPCP 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 13 is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier for implementing the CPCP 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 13A is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier for implementing the CPCP 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 14 is a phasor diagram that illustrates a Direct Cartesian 2-Branch Vector Power Amplification (VPA) method of an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 15 is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment of the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 15A is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 16 is a process flowchart embodiment for power amplification according to the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 17 is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier for implementing the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 17A is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier for implementing the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 17B is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier for implementing the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 18 is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier for implementing the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 18A is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier for implementing the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 19 is a process flowchart that illustrates an I and Q transfer function embodiment according to the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 20 is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment of an I and Q transfer function according to the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 21 is a process flowchart that illustrates an I and Q transfer function embodiment according to the CPCP 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 22 is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment of an I and Q transfer function according to the CPCP 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 23 is a process flowchart that illustrates an I and Q transfer function embodiment according to the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 24 is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment of an I and Q transfer function according to the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA method.
FIG. 25 is a phasor diagram that illustrates the effect of waveform distortion on a representation of a signal phasor.
FIG. 26 illustrates magnitude to phase transform functions according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 27 illustrates exemplary embodiments of biasing circuitry according to embodiments of the present invention.
FIG. 28 illustrates a method of combining constant envelope signals according to an embodiment the present invention.
FIG. 29 illustrates a vector power amplifier output stage embodiment according to the present invention.
FIG. 30 is a block diagram of a power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment.
FIG. 31 is a block diagram of another power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment.
FIG. 32 is a block diagram of another power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment.
FIG. 33 is a block diagram of another power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment according to the present invention.
FIG. 34 is a block diagram of another power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment according to the present invention.
FIG. 35 is a block diagram of another power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment according to the present invention.
FIG. 36 is a block diagram of another power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment according to the present invention.
FIG. 37 illustrates an example output signal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 38 illustrates an exemplary PA embodiment.
FIG. 39 illustrates an example time-varying complex envelope PA output signal and a corresponding envelop signal.
FIG. 40 illustrates example timing diagrams of a PA output stage current.
FIG. 41 illustrates exemplary output stage current control functions.
FIG. 42 is a block diagram of another power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment.
FIG. 43 illustrates an exemplary PA stage embodiment.
FIG. 44 illustrates an exemplary waved-shaped PA output signal.
FIG. 45 illustrates a power control method.
FIG. 46 illustrates another power control method.
FIG. 47 illustrates an exemplary vector power amplifier embodiment.
FIG. 48 is a process flowchart for implementing output stage current shaping according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 49 is a process flowchart for implementing harmonic control according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 50 is a process flowchart for power amplification according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIGS. 51A-I illustrate exemplary multiple-input single-output (MISO) output stage embodiments.
FIG. 52 illustrates an exemplary MISO amplifier embodiment.
FIG. 53 illustrates frequency band allocation on lower and upper spectrum bands for various communication standards.
FIGS. 54A-B illustrate feedforward techniques for compensating for errors.
FIG. 55 illustrates a receiver-based feedback error correction technique.
FIG. 56 illustrates a digital control module embodiment.
FIG. 57 illustrates another digital control module embodiment.
FIG. 58 illustrates another digital control module embodiment.
FIG. 59 illustrates a VPA analog core embodiment.
FIG. 60 illustrates an output stage embodiment according to the VPA analog core embodiment of FIG. 60.
FIG. 61 illustrates another VPA analog core embodiment.
FIG. 62 illustrates an output stage embodiment according to the VPA analog core embodiment of FIG. 61.
FIG. 63 illustrates another VPA analog core embodiment.
FIG. 64 illustrates an output stage embodiment according to the VPA analog core embodiment of FIG. 63.
FIG. 65 illustrates real-time amplifier class control using an exemplary waveform, according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 66 is an example plot of output power versus outphasing angle.
FIG. 67 illustrates exemplary power control mechanisms using an exemplary QPSK waveform, according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 68 illustrates real-time amplifier class control using an exemplary waveform, according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 69 illustrates real-time amplifier class control using an exemplary waveform, according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 70 illustrates an exemplary plot of VPA output stage theoretical efficiency versus VPA output stage current, according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 71 illustrates an exemplary VPA according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 72 is a process flowchart that illustrates a method for real-time amplifier class control in a power amplifier, according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 73 illustrates an example VPA output stage.
FIG. 74 illustrates an equivalent circuit for amplifier class S operation of the VPA output stage of FIG. 73.
FIG. 75 illustrates an equivalent circuit for amplifier class A operation of the VPA output stage of FIG. 73.
FIG. 76 is a plot that illustrates exemplary magnitude to phase shift transform functions for amplifier class A and class S operation of the VPA output stage of FIG. 73.
FIG. 77 is a plot that illustrates a spectrum of magnitude to phase shift transform functions corresponding to a range of amplifier classes of operation of the VPA output stage of FIG. 73.
FIG. 78 illustrates a mathematical derivation of the magnitude to phase shift transform in the presence of branch phase and amplitude errors.
FIG. 79 illustrates an example MISO power amplifier configuration, which can be operated as a Boolean NOR function according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 80 illustrates an example MISO power amplifier configuration, which can be operated as a Boolean OR function according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 81 illustrates an example MISO power amplifier configuration, which can be operated as a Boolean NAND function according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 82 illustrates an example MISO power amplifier configuration, which can be operated as a Boolean AND function according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 83 illustrates an example simulation test bench of a MISO power amplifier configuration which can be operated to perform a Boolean NOR function according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 84 illustrates an example simulation test bench of a MISO power amplifier configuration which can be operated to perform a Boolean NAND configuration according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 85 illustrates example upper branch and lower branch input signals provided to the MISO power amplifier configuration simulated in FIG. 83.
FIG. 86 illustrates example upper branch and lower branch input signals provided to the MISO power amplifier configuration simulated in FIG. 84.
FIG. 87 illustrates example output waveforms generated by the MISO power amplifier configurations simulated in FIGS. 83 and 84.
FIG. 88 illustrates example plots of power output versus outphasing angle for the MISO power amplifier configurations simulated in FIGS. 83 and 84.
FIG. 89 illustrates example plots of output current versus outphasing angle for the MISO power amplifier configurations simulated in FIGS. 83 and 84.
FIG. 90 illustrates example plots of power output and output current versus outphasing angle for the MISO power amplifier configurations simulated in FIGS. 83 and 84.
FIG. 91 illustrates example plots of normalized efficiency versus outphasing angle for the MISO power amplifier configurations simulated in FIGS. 83 and 84.
FIG. 92 illustrates an example combined polar-VPA architecture according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 93 illustrates another example combined polar-VPA architecture according to an embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 94 illustrates an example VPA portion of a combined polar-VPA architecture according to an embodiment of the present invention.



The present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. The drawing in which an element first appears is typically indicated by the leftmost digit(s) in the corresponding reference number.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
Table of Contents
1. Introduction


    
    
        1.1. Example Generation of Time-Varying Complex Envelope Input Signals
        1.2. Example Generation of Time-Varying Complex Envelope Signals from Constant Envelope Signals
        1.3. Vector Power Amplification Overview

2. General Mathematical Overview

        2.1. Phasor Signal Representation
        2.2. Time-Varying Complex Envelope Signals
        2.3. Constant Envelope Decomposition of Time-Varying Envelope Signals

3. Vector Power Amplification (VPA) Methods and Systems

        3.1. Cartesian 4-Branch Vector Power Amplifier
        3.2. Cartesian-Polar-Cartesian-Polar (CPCP) 2-Branch Vector Power Amplifier
        3.3. Direct Cartesian 2-Branch Vector Power Amplifier
        3.4. I and Q Data to Vector Modulator Transfer Functions
        
            3.4.1. Cartesian 4-Branch VPA Transfer Function
            3.4.2. CPCP 2-Branch VPA Transfer Function
            3.4.3. Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA Transfer Function
            3.4.4. Magnitude to Phase Shift Transform
            
                3.4.4.1. Magnitude to Phase Shift Transform for Sinusoidal Signals
                3.4.4.2. Magnitude to Phase Shift Transform for Square Wave Signals
            
            
            3.4.5. Waveform Distortion Compensation
        
        
        3.5. Output Stage
        
            3.5.1. Output Stage Embodiments
            3.5.2. Output Stage Current Shaping
            3.5.3. Output Stage Protection
        
        
        3.6. Harmonic Control
        3.7. Power Control
        3.8. Exemplary Vector Power Amplifier Embodiment

4. Additional Exemplary Embodiments and Implementations

        4.1. Overview
        
            4.1.1. Control of Output Power and Power Efficiency
            4.1.2. Error Compensation and/or Correction
            4.1.3. Multi-Band Multi-Mode Operation
        
        
        4.2. Digital Control Module
        4.3. VPA Analog Core
        
            4.3.1. VPA Analog Core Implementation A
            4.3.2. VPA Analog Core Implementation B
            4.3.3. VPA Analog Core Implementation C

5. Real-Time Amplifier Class Control of VPA Output Stage

6. Additional MISO Design Concepts

7. Summary

8. Conclusion

        
        
    
    


1. Introduction
Methods, apparatuses and systems for vector combining power amplification are disclosed herein.
Vector combining power amplification is an approach for optimizing linearity and power efficiency simultaneously. Generally speaking, and referring to flowchart 502 in FIG. 50, in step 504 a time-varying complex envelope input signal, with varying amplitude and phase, is decomposed into constant envelope constituent signals. In step 506, the constant envelope constituent signals are amplified, and then in step 508 summed to generate an amplified version of the input complex envelope signal. Since substantially constant envelope signals may be amplified with minimal concern for non-linear distortion, the result of summing the constant envelope signals suffers minimal non-linear distortion while providing optimum efficiency.
Accordingly, vector combining power amplification allows for non-linear power amplifiers to be used to efficiently amplify complex signals whilst maintaining minimal non-linear distortion levels.
For purposes of convenience, and not limitation, methods and systems of the present invention are sometimes referred to herein as vector power amplification (VPA) methods and systems.
A high-level description of VPA methods and systems according to embodiments of the present invention is now provided. For the purpose of clarity, certain terms are first defined below. The definitions described in this section are provided for convenience purposes only, and are not limiting. The meaning of these terms will be apparent to persons skilled in the art(s) based on the entirety of the teachings provided herein. These terms may be discussed throughout the specification with additional detail.
The term signal envelope, when used herein, refers to an amplitude boundary within which a signal is contained as it fluctuates in the time domain. Quadrature-modulated signals can be described by r(t)=i(t)·cos(ωc·t)+q(t)·sin(ωc·t) where i(t) and q(t) represent in-phase and quadrature signals with the signal envelope e(t), being equal to e(t)=√{square root over (i(t)2+q(t)2)}{square root over (i(t)2+q(t)2)} and the phase angle associated with r(t) is related to arctan (q(t)/i(t).
The term constant envelope signal, when used herein, refers to in-phase and quadrature signals where e(t)=√{square root over (i(t)2+q(t)2)}{square root over (i(t)2+q(t)2)}, with e(t) having a relatively or substantially constant value.
The term time-varying envelope signal, when used herein, refers to a signal having a time-varying signal envelope. A time-varying envelope signal can be described in terms of in-phase and quadrature signals as e(t)=√{square root over (i(t)2+q(t)2)}{square root over (i(t)2+q(t)2)}, with e(t) having a time-varying value.
The term phase shifting, when used herein, refers to delaying or advancing the phase component of a time-varying or constant envelope signal relative to a reference phase.
1.1) Example Generation of Complex Envelope Time-Varying Input Signals
FIGS. 1A and 1B are examples that illustrate the generation of time-varying envelope and phase complex input signals. In FIG. 1A, time-varying envelope carrier signals 104 and 106 are input into phase controller 110. Phase controller 110 manipulates the phase components of signals 104 and 106. In other words, phase controller 110 may phase shift signals 104 and 106. Resulting signals 108 and 112, accordingly, may be phased shifted relative to signals 104 and 106. In the example of FIG. 1A, phase controller 110 causes a phase reversal (180 degree phase shift) in signals 104 and 106 at time instant to, as can be seen from signals 108 and 112. Signals 108 and 112 represent time-varying complex carrier signals. Signals 108 and 112 have both time-varying envelopes and phase components. When summed, signals 108 and 112 result in signal 114. Signal 114 also represents a time-varying complex signal. Signal 114 may be an example input signal into VPA embodiments of the present invention (for example, an example input into step 504 of FIG. 50).
Time-varying complex signals may also be generated as illustrated in FIG. 1B. In FIG. 1B, signals 116 and 118 represent baseband signals. For example, signals 116 and 118 may be in-phase (I) and quadrature (Q) baseband components of a signal. In the example of FIG. 1B, signals 116 and 118 undergo a zero crossing as they transition from +1 to −1. Signals 116 and 118 are multiplied by signal 120 or signal 120 phase shifted by 90 degrees. Signal 116 is multiplied by a 0 degree shifted version of signal 120. Signal 118 is multiplied by a 90 degree shifted version of signal 120. Resulting signals 122 and 124 represent time-varying complex carrier signals. Note that signals 122 and 124 have envelopes that vary according to the time-varying amplitudes of signals 116 and 118. Further, signals 122 and 124 both undergo phase reversals at the zero crossings of signals 116 and 118. Signals 122 and 124 are summed to result in signal 126. Signal 126 represents a time-varying complex signal. Signal 126 may represent an example input signal into VPA embodiments of the present invention. Additionally, signals 116 and 118 may represent example input signals into VPA embodiments of the present invention.
1.2) Example Generation of Time-Varying Complex Envelope Signals from Constant Envelope Signals
The description in this section generally relates to the operation of step 508 in FIG. 50. FIG. 1C illustrates three examples for the generation of time-varying complex signals from the sum of two or more substantially constant envelope signals. A person skilled in the art will appreciate, however, based on the teachings provided herein that the concepts illustrated in the examples of FIG. 1C can be similarly extended to the case of more than two constant envelope signals.
In example 1 of FIG. 1C, constant envelope signals 132 and 134 are input into phase controller 130. Phase controller 130 manipulates phase components of signals 132 and 134 to generate signals 136 and 138, respectively. Signals 136 and 138 represent substantially constant envelope signals, and are summed to generate signal 140. The phasor representation in FIG. 1C, associated with example 1 illustrates signals 136 and 138 as phasors P136 and P138, respectively. Signal 140 is illustrated as phasor P140. In example 1, P136 and P138 are symmetrically phase shifted by an angle φ1 relative to a reference signal assumed to be aligned with the real axis of the phasor representation. Correspondingly, time domain signals 136 and 138 are phase shifted in equal amounts but opposite directions relative to the reference signal. Accordingly, P140, which is the sum of P136 and P138, is in-phase with the reference signal.
In example 2 of FIG. 1C, substantially constant envelope signals 132 and 134 are input into phase controller 130. Phase controller 130 manipulates phase components of signals 132 and 134 to generate signals 142 and 144, respectively. Signals 142 and 144 are substantially constant envelope signals, and are summed to generate signal 150. The phasor representation associated with example 2 illustrates signals 142 and 144 as phasors P142 and P144, respectively. Signal 150 is illustrated as phasor P150. In example 2, P142 and P144 are symmetrically phase shifted relative to a reference signal. Accordingly, similar to P140, P150 is also in-phase with the reference signal. P142 and P144, however, are phase shifted by an angle whereby φ2≠φ1 relative to the reference signal. P150, as a result, has a different magnitude than P140 of example 1. In the time domain representation, it is noted that signals 140 and 150 are in-phase but have different amplitudes relative to each other.
In example 3 of FIG. 1C, substantially constant envelope signals 132 and 134 are input into phase controller 130. Phase controller 130 manipulates phase components of signals 132 and 134 to generate signals 146 and 148, respectively. Signals 146 and 148 are substantially constant envelope signals, and are summed to generate signal 160. The phasor representation associated with example 3 illustrates signals 146 and 148 as phasors P146 and P148, respectively. Signal 160 is illustrated as phasor P160. In example 3, P146 is phased shifted by an angle φ3 relative to the reference signal. P148 is phase shifted by an angle φ4 relative to the reference signal. φ3 and φ4 may or may not be equal. Accordingly, P160, which is the sum of P146 and P148, is no longer in-phase with the reference signal. P160 is phased shifted by an angle Θ relative to the reference signal. Similarly, P160 is phase shifted by Θ relative to P140 and P150 of examples 1 and 2. P160 may also vary in amplitude relative to P140 as illustrated in example 3.
In summary, the examples of FIG. 1C demonstrate that a time-varying amplitude signal can be obtained by the sum of two or more substantially constant envelope signals (Example 1). Further, the time-varying signal can have amplitude changes but no phase changes imparted thereon by equally shifting in opposite directions the two or more substantially constant envelope signals (Example 2). Equally shifting in the same direction the two or more constant envelope constituents of the signal, phase changes but no amplitude changes can be imparted on the time-varying signal. Any time-varying amplitude and phase signal can be generated using two or more substantially constant envelope signals (Example 3).
It is noted that signals in the examples of FIG. 1C are shown as sinusoidal waveforms for purpose of illustration only. A person skilled in the art will appreciate based on the teachings herein that other types of waveforms may also have been used. It should also be noted that the examples of FIG. 1C are provided herein for the purpose of illustration only, and may or may not correspond to a particular embodiment of the present invention.
1.3) Vector Power Amplification Overview
A high-level overview of vector power amplification is now provided. FIG. 1D illustrates the power amplification of an exemplary time-varying complex input signal 172. Signals 114 and 126 as illustrated in FIGS. 1A and 1B may be examples of signal 172. Further, signal 172 may be generated by or comprised of two or more constituent signals such as 104 and 106 (FIG. 1A), 108 and 112 (FIG. 1A), 116 and 118 (FIG. 1B), and 122 and 124 (FIG. 1B).
In the example of FIG. 1D, VPA 170 represents a VPA system embodiment according to the present invention. VPA 170 amplifies signal 172 to generate amplified output signal 178. Output signal 178 is amplified efficiently with minimal distortion.
In the example of FIG. 1D, signals 172 and 178 represent voltage signals Vin(t) and Volt(t), respectively. At any time instant, in the example of FIG. 1D, Vin(t) and Volt(t) are related such that Volt(t)=Kevin(tat′), where K is a scale factor and t′ represents a time delay that may be present in the VPA system. For power implication,




  
    
      
        
          V
          out
          2
        
        ⁡
        
          (
          t
          )
        
      
      
        Z
        out
      
    
    >
    
      
        
          V
          
            i
            ⁢
            
              
            
            ⁢
            n
          
          2
        
        ⁡
        
          (
          t
          )
        
      
      
        Z
        
          i
          ⁢
          
            
          
          ⁢
          n
        
      
    
  
  ,




where output signal 178 is a power amplified version of input signal 172.

Linear (or substantially linear) power amplification of time-varying complex signals, as illustrated in FIG. 1D, is achieved according to embodiments of the present as shown in FIG. 1E.
FIG. 1E is an example block diagram that conceptually illustrates a vector power amplification embodiment according to embodiments of the present invention. In FIG. 1E, input signal 172 represents a time-varying complex signal. For example, input signal 172 may be generated as illustrated in FIGS. 1A and 1B. In embodiments, signal 172 may be a digital or an analog signal. Further, signal 172 may be a baseband or a carrier-based signal.
Referring to FIG. 1E, according to embodiments of the present invention, input signal 172 or equivalents thereof are input into VPA 182. In the embodiment of FIG. 1E, VPA 182 includes a state machine 184 and analog circuitry 186. State machine 184 may include digital and/or analog components. Analog circuitry 186 includes analog components. VPA 182 processes input signal 172 to generate two or more signals 188-{1, . . . , n}, as illustrated in FIG. 1E. As described with respect to signals 136, 138, 142, 144, and 146, 148, in FIG. 1C, signals 188-{1, . . . , n} may or may not be phase shifted relative to each other over different periods of time. Further, VPA 182 generates signals 188-{1, . . . , n} such that a sum of signals 188-{1, . . . , n} results in signal 194 which, in certain embodiments, can be an amplified version of signal 172.
Still referring to FIG. 1E, signals 188-{1, . . . , n} are substantially constant envelope signals. Accordingly, the description in the prior paragraph corresponds to step 504 in FIG. 50.
In the example of FIG. 1E, generally corresponding to step 506 in FIG. 50, constant envelope signals 188-{1, . . . , n} are each independently amplified by a corresponding power amplifier (PA) 190-{1, . . . , n} to generate amplified signals 192-{1, . . . , n}. In embodiments, PAs 190-{1, . . . , n} amplify substantially equally respective constant envelope signals 188-{1, . . . , n}. Amplified signals 192-{1, . . . , n} are substantially constant envelope signals, and in step 508 are summed to generate output signal 194. Note that output signal 194 can be a linearly (or substantially linearly) amplified version of input signal 172. Output signal 194 may also be a frequency-upconverted version of input signal 172, as described herein.
2. General Mathematical Overview
2.1) Phasor Signal Representation
FIG. 1 illustrates a phasor representation {right arrow over (R)} 102 of a signal r(t). A phasor representation of a signal is explicitly representative of the magnitude of the signal's envelope and of the signal's phase shift relative to a reference signal. In this document, for purposes of convenience, and not limitation, the reference signal is defined as being aligned with the real (Re) axis of the orthogonal space of the phasor representation. The invention is not, however, limited to this embodiment. The frequency information of the signal is implicit in the representation, and is given by the frequency of the reference signal. For example, referring to FIG. 1, and assuming that the real axis corresponds to a cos(ωt) reference signal, phasor {right arrow over (R)} would translate to the function r(t)=R(t) cos(ωt+φ(t)), where R is the magnitude of {right arrow over (R)}.
Still referring to FIG. 1, it is noted that phasor {right arrow over (R)} can be decomposed into a real part phasor {right arrow over (I)} and an imaginary part phasor {right arrow over (Q)}. {right arrow over (I)} and {right arrow over (Q)} are said to be the in-phase and quadrature phasor components of {right arrow over (R)} with respect to the reference signal. It is further noted that the signals that correspond to {right arrow over (I)} and {right arrow over (Q)} are related to r(t) as I(t)=R(t)·cos(φ(t)) and Q(t)=R(t)·sin(φ(t)), respectively. In the time domain, signal r(t) can also be written in terms of its in-phase and quadrature components as follows:

r(t)=I(t)·cos(ωt)+Q(t)·sin(ωt)=R(t)·cos(φ(t))·cos(ωt)+R(t)·sin(φ(t))·sin(ωt)  (1)

Note that, in the example of FIG. 1, R(t) is illustrated at a particular instant of time.
2.2) Time-Varying Complex Envelope Signals
FIG. 2 illustrates a phasor representation of a signal r(t) at two different instants of time t1 and t2. It is noted that the magnitude of the phasor, which represents the magnitude of the signal's envelope, as well as its relative phase shift both vary from time t1 to time t2. In FIG. 2, this is illustrated by the varying magnitude of phasors {right arrow over (R1)} and {right arrow over (R2)} and their corresponding phase shift angles φ1 and φ2. Signal r(t), accordingly, is a time-varying complex envelope signal.
It is further noted, from FIG. 2, that the real and imaginary phasor components of signal r(t) are also time-varying in amplitude. Accordingly, their corresponding time domain signals also have time-varying envelopes.
FIGS. 3A-3C illustrate an example modulation to generate a time-varying complex envelope signal. FIG. 3A illustrates a view of a signal m(t). FIG. 3B illustrates a view of a portion of a carrier signal c(t). FIG. 3C illustrates a signal r(t) that results from the multiplication of signals m(t) and c(t).
In the example of FIG. 3A, signal m(t) is a time-varying magnitude signal. m(t) further undergoes a zero crossing. Carrier signal c(t), in the example of FIG. 3B, oscillates at some carrier frequency, typically higher than that of signal m(t).
From FIG. 3C, it can be noted that the resulting signal r(t) has a time-varying envelope. Further, it is noted, from FIG. 3C, that r(t) undergoes a reversal in phase at the moment when the modulating signal m(t) crosses zero. Having both non-constant envelope and phase, r(t) is said to be a time-varying complex envelope signal.
2.3 Constant Envelope Decomposition of Time-Varying Envelope Signals
Any phasor of time-varying magnitude and phase can be obtained by the sum of two or more constant magnitude phasors having appropriately specified phase shifts relative to a reference phasor.
FIG. 3D illustrates a view of an example time-varying envelope and phase signal S(t). For ease of illustration, signal S(t) is assumed to be a sinusoidal signal having a maximum envelope magnitude A. FIG. 3D further shows an example of how signal S(t) can be obtained, at any instant of time, by the sum of two constant envelope signals S1(t) and S2(t). Generally, S1(t)=A1 sin(ωt+φ1(t)) and S1(t)=A2 sin(ωt+φ2(t)).
For the purpose of illustration, three views are provided in FIG. 3D that illustrate how by appropriately phasing signals S1(t) and S2(t) relative to S(t), signals S1(t) and S2(t) can be summed so that S(t)=K(S1(t)+S2(t)) where K is a constant. In other words, signal S(t) can be decomposed, at any time instant, into two or more signals. From FIG. 3D, over period T1, S1(t) and S2(t) are both in-phase relative to signal S(t), and thus sum to the maximum envelope magnitude A of signal S(t). Over period T3, however, signals S1(t) and S2(t) are 180 degree out-of-phase relative to each other, and thus sum to a minimum envelope magnitude of signal S(t).
The example of FIG. 3D illustrates the case of sinusoidal signals. A person skilled in the art, however, will understand that any time-varying envelope, which modulates a carrier signal that can be represented by a Fourier series or Fourier transform, can be similarly decomposed into two or more substantially constant envelope signals. Thus, by controlling the phase of a plurality of substantially constant envelope signals, any time-varying complex envelope signal can be generated.
3. Vector Power Amplification Methods and Systems
Vector power amplification methods and systems according to embodiments of the present invention rely on the ability to decompose any time-varying envelope signal into two or more substantially constant envelope constituent signals or to receive or generate such constituent signals, amplify the constituent signals, and then sum the amplified signals to generate an amplified version of the time-varying complex envelope signal.
In sections 3.1-3.3, vector power amplification (VPA) embodiments of the present invention are provided, including 4-branch and 2-branch embodiments. In the description, each VPA embodiment is first presented conceptually using a mathematical derivation of underlying concepts of the embodiment. An embodiment of a method of operation of the VPA embodiment is then presented, followed by various system level embodiments of the VPA embodiment.
Section 3.4 presents various embodiments of control modules according to embodiments of the present invention. Control modules according to embodiments of the present invention may be used to enable certain VPA embodiments of the present invention. In some embodiments, the control modules are intermediary between an input stage of the VPA embodiment and a subsequent vector modulation stage of the VPA embodiment.
Section 3.5 describes VPA output stage embodiments according to embodiments of the present invention. Output stage embodiments are directed to generating the output signal of a VPA embodiment.
Section 3.6 is directed to harmonic control according to embodiments of the present invention. Harmonic control may be implemented in certain embodiments of the present invention to manipulate the real and imaginary power in the harmonics of the VPA embodiment, thus increasing the power present in the fundamental frequency at the output.
Section 3.7 is directed to power control according to embodiments of the present invention. Power control may be implemented in certain embodiments of the present invention in order to satisfy power level requirements of applications where VPA embodiments of the present invention may be employed.
3.1) Cartesian 4-Branch Vector Power Amplifier
According to one embodiment of the invention, herein called the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA embodiment for ease of illustration and not limitation, a time-varying complex envelope signal is decomposed into 4 substantially constant envelope constituent signals. The constituent signals are equally or substantially equally amplified individually, and then summed to construct an amplified version of the original time-varying complex envelope signal.
It is noted that 4 branches are employed in this embodiment for purposes of illustration, and not limitation. The scope of the invention covers use of other numbers of branches, and implementation of such variations will be apparent to persons skilled in the art based on the teachings contained herein.
In one embodiment, a time-varying complex envelope signal is first decomposed into its in-phase and quadrature vector components. In phasor representation, the in-phase and quadrature vector components correspond to the signal's real part and imaginary part phasors, respectively.
As described above, magnitudes of the in-phase and quadrature vector components of a signal vary proportionally to the signal's magnitude, and are thus not constant envelope when the signal is a time-varying envelope signal. Accordingly, the 4-Branch VPA embodiment further decomposes each of the in-phase and quadrature vector components of the signal into four substantially constant envelope components, two for the in-phase and two for the quadrature signal components. This concept is illustrated in FIG. 4 using a phasor signal representation.
In the example of FIG. 4, phasors {right arrow over (I1)} and {right arrow over (I2)} correspond to the real part phasors of an exemplary time-varying complex envelope signal at two instants of time t1 and t2, respectively. It is noted that phasors {right arrow over (I1)} and {right arrow over (I2)} have different magnitudes.
Still referring to FIG. 4, at instant t1, phasor {right arrow over (I1)} can be obtained by the sum of upper and lower phasors {right arrow over (IU1)} and {right arrow over (IL1)}. Similarly, at instant t2, phasor {right arrow over (I2)} can be obtained by the sum of upper and lower phasors {right arrow over (IU2)} and {right arrow over (IL2)}. Note that phasors {right arrow over (IU1)} and {right arrow over (IU2)} have equal or substantially equal magnitude. Similarly, phasors {right arrow over (IL1)} and {right arrow over (IL2)} have substantially equal magnitude. Accordingly, the real part phasor of the time-varying envelope signal can be obtained at any time instant by the sum of at least two substantially constant envelope components.
The phase shifts of phasors {right arrow over (IU1)} and {right arrow over (IL1)} relative to {right arrow over (I1)} as well as the phase shifts of phasors {right arrow over (IU2)} and {right arrow over (IL2)} relative to {right arrow over (I2)} are set according to the desired magnitude of phasors {right arrow over (I1)} and {right arrow over (I2)}, respectively. In one case, when the upper and lower phasors are selected to have equal magnitude, the upper and lower phasors are symmetrically shifted in phase relative to the phasor. This is illustrated in the example of FIG. 4, and corresponds to {right arrow over (IU1)}, {right arrow over (IL1)}, {right arrow over (IU2)}, and {right arrow over (IL2)} all having equal magnitude. In a second case, the phase shift of the upper and lower phasors are substantially symmetrically shifted in phase relative to the phasor. Based on the description herein, anyone skilled in the art will understand that the magnitude and phase shift of the upper and lower phasors do not have to be exactly equal in value
As an example, it can be further verified that, for the case illustrated in FIG. 4, the relative phase shifts, illustrated as




  
    
      φ
      1
    
    2
  
  ⁢
  
    
  
  ⁢
  and
  ⁢
  
    
  
  ⁢
  
    
      φ
      2
    
    2
  




in FIG. 4, are related to the magnitudes of normalized phasors {right arrow over (I1)} and {right arrow over (I2)} as follows:





  
    
      
        
          
            
              
                φ
                1
              
              2
            
            =
            
              
                cot
                
                  -
                  1
                
              
              (
              
                
                  I
                  1
                
                
                  2
                  ⁢
                  
                    
                      1
                      -
                      
                        
                          I
                          1
                          2
                        
                        4
                      
                    
                  
                
              
              )
            
          
          ;
        
        ⁢
        
          

        
        ⁢
        and
      
    
    
      
        (
        2
        )
      
    
  
  
    
      
        
          
            
              φ
              2
            
            2
          
          =
          
            
              cot
              
                -
                1
              
            
            (
            
              
                I
                2
              
              
                2
                ⁢
                
                  
                    1
                    -
                    
                      
                        I
                        2
                        2
                      
                      4
                    
                  
                
              
            
            )
          
        
        ,
      
    
    
      
        (
        3
        )
      
    
  




wherein I1 and I2 represent the normalized magnitudes of phasors {right arrow over (I1)} and {right arrow over (I2)} respectively, and wherein the domains of I1 and I2 are restricted appropriately according to the domain over which equation (2) and (3) are valid. It is noted that equations (2) and (3) are one representation for relating the relative phase shifts to the normalized magnitudes. Other, solutions, equivalent representations, and/or simplified representations of equations (2) and (3) may also be employed. Look up tables relating relative phase shifts to normalized magnitudes may also be used.

The concept describe above can be similarly applied to the imaginary phasor or the quadrature component part of a signal r(t) as illustrated in FIG. 4. Accordingly, at any time instant t, imaginary phasor part {right arrow over (Q)} of signal r(t) can be obtained by summing upper and lower phasor components {right arrow over (QU)} and {right arrow over (QL)} of substantially equal and constant magnitude. In this example, {right arrow over (QU)} and {right arrow over (QL)} are symmetrically shifted in phase relative to {right arrow over (Q)} by an angle set according to the magnitude of {right arrow over (Q)} at time t. The relationship of {right arrow over (QU)} and {right arrow over (QL)} to the desired phasor {right arrow over (Q)} are related as defined in equations 2 and 3 by substituting Q1 and Q2 for I1 and I2 respectively.
It follows from the above discussion that, in phasor representation, any phasor {right arrow over (R)} of variable magnitude and phase can be constructed by the sum of four substantially constant magnitude phasor components:

{right arrow over (R)}={right arrow over (IU)}+{right arrow over (IL)}+{right arrow over (QU)}+{right arrow over (QL)};

{right arrow over (IU)}+{right arrow over (IL)}={right arrow over (I)}; 

{right arrow over (QU)}+{right arrow over (QL)}={right arrow over (Q)}; 

IU=IL=constant;

QU=QL=constant;  (4)

where IU, IL, QU, and QL represent the magnitudes of phasors {right arrow over (IU)}, {right arrow over (IL)}, {right arrow over (QU)}, and {right arrow over (QL)}, respectively.

Correspondingly, in the time domain, a time-varying complex envelope sinusoidal signal r(t)=R(t) cos(ωt+φ) is constructed by the sum of four constant envelope signals as follows:




  
    
      
        
          
        
        ⁢
        
          
            
              
                
                  
                    
                      r
                      ⁡
                      
                        (
                        t
                        )
                      
                    
                    =
                    
                      
                        
                          I
                          U
                        
                        ⁡
                        
                          (
                          t
                          )
                        
                      
                      +
                      
                        
                          I
                          L
                        
                        ⁡
                        
                          (
                          t
                          )
                        
                      
                      +
                      
                        
                          Q
                          U
                        
                        ⁡
                        
                          (
                          t
                          )
                        
                      
                      +
                      
                        
                          Q
                          L
                        
                        ⁡
                        
                          (
                          t
                          )
                        
                      
                    
                  
                  ;
                
                ⁢
                
                  

                
                ⁢
                
                  
                    I
                    U
                  
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    t
                    )
                  
                
              
              =
              
                
                  
                    sgn
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        I
                        →
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    I
                    U
                  
                  ×
                  
                    cos
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        
                          φ
                          I
                        
                        2
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    cos
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
                +
                
                  
                    I
                    U
                  
                  ×
                  
                    sin
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        
                          φ
                          I
                        
                        2
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    sin
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
              
            
            ;
          
          ⁢
          
            

          
          ⁢
          
            
              
                
                  I
                  L
                
                ⁡
                
                  (
                  t
                  )
                
              
              =
              
                
                  
                    sgn
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        I
                        →
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    I
                    L
                  
                  ×
                  
                    cos
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        
                          φ
                          I
                        
                        2
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    cos
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
                -
                
                  
                    I
                    L
                  
                  ×
                  
                    sin
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        
                          φ
                          I
                        
                        2
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    sin
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
              
            
            ;
          
          ⁢
          
            

          
          ⁢
          
            
              
                
                  Q
                  U
                
                ⁡
                
                  (
                  t
                  )
                
              
              =
              
                
                  
                    -
                    
                      sgn
                      ⁡
                      
                        (
                        
                          Q
                          →
                        
                        )
                      
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    Q
                    U
                  
                  ×
                  
                    cos
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        
                          φ
                          Q
                        
                        2
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    sin
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
                +
                
                  
                    Q
                    U
                  
                  ×
                  
                    sin
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        
                          φ
                          Q
                        
                        2
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    cos
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
              
            
            ;
          
          ⁢
          
            

          
          ⁢
          
            
              
                Q
                L
              
              ⁡
              
                (
                t
                )
              
            
            =
            
              
                
                  -
                  
                    sgn
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        Q
                        →
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
                ×
                
                  Q
                  L
                
                ×
                
                  cos
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    
                      
                        φ
                        Q
                      
                      2
                    
                    )
                  
                
                ×
                
                  sin
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    
                      ω
                      ⁢
                      
                        
                      
                      ⁢
                      t
                    
                    )
                  
                
              
              -
              
                
                  Q
                  L
                
                ×
                
                  sin
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    
                      
                        φ
                        Q
                      
                      2
                    
                    )
                  
                
                ×
                
                  
                    cos
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                  .
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
    
      
        (
        5
        )
      
    
  




where sgn({right arrow over (I)})=±1 depending on whether {right arrow over (I)} is in-phase or 180° degrees out-of-phase with the positive real axis. Similarly, sgn({right arrow over (Q)})=±1 depending on whether {right arrow over (Q)} is in-phase or 180° degrees out-of-phase with the imaginary axis.





  
    φ
    I
  
  2




corresponds to the phase shift of {right arrow over (IU)} and {right arrow over (IL)} relative to the real axis. Similarly,





  
    φ
    Q
  
  2




corresponds to the phase shift of {right arrow over (QU)} and {right arrow over (QL)} relative to the imaginary axis.





  
    
      φ
      I
    
    2
  
  ⁢
  
    
  
  ⁢
  and
  ⁢
  
    
  
  ⁢
  
    
      φ
      Q
    
    2
  




can be calculated using the equations given in (2) and (3).

Equations (5) can be further simplified as:




  
    
      
        
          
            
              
                r
                ⁡
                
                  (
                  t
                  )
                
              
              =
              
                
                  
                    I
                    U
                  
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    t
                    )
                  
                
                +
                
                  
                    I
                    L
                  
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    t
                    )
                  
                
                +
                
                  
                    Q
                    U
                  
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    t
                    )
                  
                
                +
                
                  
                    Q
                    L
                  
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    t
                    )
                  
                
              
            
            ;
          
          ⁢
          
            

          
          ⁢
          
            
              
                
                  I
                  U
                
                ⁡
                
                  (
                  t
                  )
                
              
              =
              
                
                  
                    sgn
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        I
                        →
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    I
                    UX
                  
                  ×
                  
                    cos
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
                +
                
                  
                    I
                    UY
                  
                  ×
                  
                    sin
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
              
            
            ;
          
          ⁢
          
            

          
          ⁢
          
            
              
                
                  I
                  L
                
                ⁡
                
                  (
                  t
                  )
                
              
              =
              
                
                  
                    sgn
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        I
                        →
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    I
                    UX
                  
                  ×
                  
                    cos
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
                -
                
                  
                    I
                    UY
                  
                  ×
                  
                    sin
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
              
            
            ;
            where
          
          ⁢
          
            

          
          ⁢
          
            
              
                
                  Q
                  U
                
                ⁡
                
                  (
                  t
                  )
                
              
              =
              
                
                  
                    -
                    
                      Q
                      UX
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    cos
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
                +
                
                  
                    sgn
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        Q
                        →
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    Q
                    UY
                  
                  ×
                  
                    sin
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
              
            
            ;
          
          ⁢
          
            

          
          ⁢
          
            
              
                Q
                L
              
              ⁡
              
                (
                t
                )
              
            
            =
            
              
                
                  
                    Q
                    UY
                  
                  ×
                  
                    cos
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        ω
                        ⁢
                        
                          
                        
                        ⁢
                        t
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
                -
                
                  
                    sgn
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        Q
                        →
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                  ×
                  
                    Q
                    UY
                  
                  ×
                  
                    
                      sin
                      ⁡
                      
                        (
                        
                          ω
                          ⁢
                          
                            
                          
                          ⁢
                          t
                        
                        )
                      
                    
                    .
                    
                      

                    
                    ⁢
                    
                      I
                      UX
                    
                  
                
              
              =
              
                
                  
                    I
                    U
                  
                  ×
                  
                    cos
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        
                          φ
                          I
                        
                        2
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
                =
                
                  
                    I
                    L
                  
                  ×
                  
                    cos
                    ⁡
                    
                      (
                      
                        
                          φ
                          I
                        
                        2
                      
                      )
                    
                  
                
              
            
          
          ,
          
            

          
          ⁢
          
            
              I
              UY
            
            =
            
              
                
                  I
                  U
                
                ×
                
                  sin
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    
                      
                        φ
                        I
                      
                      2
                    
                    )
                  
                
              
              =
              
                
                  I
                  L
                
                ×
                
                  sin
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    
                      
                        φ
                        I
                      
                      2
                    
                    )
                  
                
              
            
          
          ,
          
            

          
          ⁢
          
            
              Q
              UX
            
            =
            
              
                
                  Q
                  U
                
                ×
                
                  sin
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    
                      
                        φ
                        Q
                      
                      2
                    
                    )
                  
                
              
              =
              
                
                  Q
                  L
                
                ×
                
                  sin
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    
                      
                        φ
                        Q
                      
                      2
                    
                    )
                  
                
              
            
          
          ,
          and
        
        ⁢
        
          

        
        ⁢
        
          
            Q
            UY
          
          =
          
            
              
                Q
                U
              
              ×
              
                cos
                ⁡
                
                  (
                  
                    
                      φ
                      Q
                    
                    2
                  
                  )
                
              
            
            =
            
              
                Q
                L
              
              ×
              
                
                  cos
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    
                      
                        φ
                        Q
                      
                      2
                    
                    )
                  
                
                .
              
            
          
        
      
    
    
      
        (
        6
        )
      
    
  




It can be understood by a person skilled in the art that, whereas the time domain representations in equations (5) and (6) have been provided for the case of a sinusoidal waveform, equivalent representations can be developed for non-sinusoidal waveforms using appropriate basis functions. Further, as understood by a person skilled in the art based on the teachings herein, the above-describe two-dimensional decomposition into substantially constant envelope signals can be extended appropriately into a multi-dimensional decomposition.
FIG. 5 is an example block diagram of the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA embodiment. An output signal r(t) 578 of desired power level and frequency characteristics is generated from baseband in-phase and quadrature components according to the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA embodiment.
In the example of FIG. 5, a frequency generator such as a synthesizer 510 generates a reference signal A*cos(ωt) 511 having the same frequency as that of output signal r(t) 578. It can be understood by a person skilled in the art that the choice of the reference signal is made according to the desired output signal. For example, if the desired frequency of the desired output signal is 2.4 GHz, then the frequency of the reference signal is set to be 2.4 GHz. In this manner, embodiments of the invention achieve frequency up-conversion.
Referring to FIG. 5, one or more phase splitters are used to generate signals 521, 531, 541, and 551 based on the reference signal 511. In the example of FIG. 5, this is done using phase splitters 512, 514, and 516 and by applying 0° phase shifts at each of the phase splitters. A person skilled in the art will appreciate, however, that various techniques may be used for generating signals 521, 531, 541, and 551 of the reference signal 511. For example, a 1:4 phase splitter may be used to generate the four replicas 521, 531, 541, and 551 in a single step or in the example embodiment of FIG. 5, signal 511 can be directly coupled to signals 521, 531, 541, 551 Depending on the embodiment, a variety of phase shifts may also be applied to result in the desired signals 521, 531, 541, and 551.
Still referring to FIG. 5, the signals 521, 531, 541, and 551 are each provided to a corresponding vector modulator 520, 530, 540, and 550, respectively. Vector modulators 520, 530, 540, and 550, in conjunction with their appropriate input signals, generate four constant envelope constituents of signal r(t) according to the equations provided in (6). In the example embodiment of FIG. 5, vector modulators 520 and 530 generate the IU(t) and IL(t) components, respectively, of signal r(t). Similarly, vector modulators 540 and 550 generate the QU(t) and QL(t) components, respectively, of signal r(t).
The actual implementation of each of vector modulators 520, 530, 540, and 550 may vary. It will be understood by a person skilled in the art, for example, that various techniques exist for generating the constant envelope constituents according to the equations in (6).
In the example embodiment of FIG. 5, each of vector modulators 520, 530, 540, 550 includes an input phase splitter 522, 532, 542, 552 for phasing the signals 522, 531, 541, 551. Accordingly, input phase splitters 522, 532, 542, 552 are used to generate an in-phase and a quadrature components or their respective input signals.
In each vector modulator 520, 530, 540, 550, the in-phase and quadrature components are multiplied with amplitude information. In FIG. 5, for example, multiplier 524 multiplies the quadrature component of signal 521 with the quadrature amplitude information IUY of IU(t). In parallel, multiplier 526 multiplies the in-phase replica signal with the in-phase amplitude information sgn(I)×IUX of IU(t).
To generate the IU(t) constant envelope constituent signals 525 and 527 are summed using phase splitter 528 or alternate summing techniques. The resulting signal 529 corresponds to the IU(t) component of signal r(t).
In similar fashion as described above, vector modulators 530, 540, and 550, respectively, generate the IL(t), QU(t), and QL(t) components of signal r(t). IL(t), QU(t), and QL(t), respectively, correspond to signals 539, 549, and 559 in FIG. 5.
Further, as described above, signals 529, 539, 549, and 559 are characterized by having substantially equal and constant magnitude envelopes. Accordingly, when signals 529, 539, 549, and 559 are input into corresponding power amplifiers (PA) 562, 564, 566, and 568, corresponding amplified signals 563, 565, 567, and 569 are substantially constant envelope signals.
Power amplifiers 562, 564, 566, and 568 amplify each of the signals 529, 539, 549, 559, respectively. In an embodiment, substantially equal power amplification is applied to each of the signals 529, 539, 549, and 559. In an embodiment, the power amplification level of PAs 562, 564, 566, and 568 is set according to the desired power level of output signal r(t).
Still referring to FIG. 5, amplified signals 563 and 565 are summed using summer 572 to generate an amplified version 573 of the in-phase component {right arrow over (I)}(t) of signal r(t). Similarly, amplified signals 567 and 569 are summed using summer 574 to generate an amplified version 575 of the quadrature component {right arrow over (Q)}(t) of signal r(t).
Signals 573 and 575 are summed using summer 576, as shown in FIG. 5, with the resulting signal corresponding to desired output signal r(t).
It must be noted that, in the example of FIG. 5, summers 572, 574, and 576 are being used for the purpose of illustration only. Various techniques may be used to sum amplified signals 563, 565, 567, and 569. For example, amplified signals 563, 565, 567, and 569 may be summed all in one step to result in signal 578. In fact, according to various VPA embodiments of the present invention, it suffices that the summing is done after amplification. Certain VPA embodiments of the present invention, as will be further described below, use minimally lossy summing techniques such as direct coupling via wire. Alternatively, certain VPA embodiments use conventional power combining techniques. In other embodiments, as will be further described below, power amplifiers 562, 564, 566, and 568 can be implemented as a multiple-input single-output power amplifier.
Operation of the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA embodiment shall now be further described with reference to the process flowchart of FIG. 6. The process begins at step 610, which includes receiving the baseband representation of the desired output signal. In an embodiment, this involves receiving in-phase (I) and quadrature (Q) components of the desired output signal. In another embodiment, this involves receiving magnitude and phase of the desired output signal. In an embodiment of the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA embodiment, the I and Q are baseband components. In another embodiment, the I and Q are RF components and are down-converted to baseband.
Step 620 includes receiving a clock signal set according to a desired output signal frequency of the desired output signal. In the example of FIG. 5, step 620 is achieved by receiving reference signal 511.
Step 630 includes processing the I component to generate first and second signals having the output signal frequency. The first and second signals have substantially constant and equal magnitude envelopes and a sum equal to the I component. The first and second signals correspond to the IU(t) and IL(t) constant envelope constituents described above. In the example of FIG. 5, step 630 is achieved by vector modulators 520 and 530, in conjunction with their appropriate input signals.
Step 640 includes processing the Q component to generate third and fourth signals having the output signal frequency. The third and fourth signals have substantially constant and equal magnitude envelopes and a sum equal to the Q component. The third and fourth signals correspond to the QU(t) and QL(t) constant envelope constituents described above. In the example of FIG. 5, step 630 is achieved by vector modulators 540 and 550, in conjunction with their appropriate input signals.
Step 650 includes individually amplifying each of the first, second, third, and fourth signals, and summing the amplified signals to generate the desired output signal. In an embodiment, the amplification of the first, second, third, and fourth signals is substantially equal and according to a desired power level of the desired output signal. In the example of FIG. 5, step 650 is achieved by power amplifiers 562, 564, 566, and 568 amplifying respective signals 529, 539, 549, and 559, and by summers 572, 574, and 576 summing amplified signals 563, 565, 567, and 569 to generate output signal 578.
FIG. 7A is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier 700 implementing the process flowchart 600 of FIG. 6. In the example of FIG. 7A, optional components are illustrated with dashed lines. In other embodiments, additional components may be optional.
Vector power amplifier 700 includes an in-phase (I) branch 703 and a quadrature (Q) branch 705. Each of the I and Q branches further comprises a first branch and a second branch.
In-phase (I) information signal 702 is received by an I Data Transfer Function module 710. In an embodiment, I information signal 702 includes a digital baseband signal. In an embodiment, I Data Transfer Function module 710 samples I information signal 702 according to a sample clock 706. In another embodiment, I information signal 702 includes an analog baseband signal, which is converted to digital using an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) (not shown in FIG. 7A) before being input into I Data Transfer Function module 710. In another embodiment, I information signal 702 includes an analog baseband signal which input in analog form into I Data Transfer Function module 710, which also includes analog circuitry. In another embodiment, I information signal 702 includes a RF signal which is down-converted to baseband before being input into I Data Transfer Function module 710 using any of the above described embodiments.
I Data Transfer Function module 710 processes I information signal 702, and determines in-phase and quadrature amplitude information of at least two constant envelope constituent signals of I information signal 702. As described above with reference to FIG. 5, the in-phase and quadrature vector modulator input amplitude information corresponds to sgn(I)×IUX and IUY, respectively. The operation of I Data Transfer Function module 710 is further described below in section 3.4.
I Data Transfer Function module 710 outputs information signals 722 and 724 used to control the in-phase and quadrature amplitude components of vector modulators 760 and 762. In an embodiment, signals 722 and 724 are digital signals. Accordingly, each of signals 722 and 724 is fed into a corresponding digital-to-analog converter (DAC) 730 and 732, respectively. The resolution and sample rate of DACs 730 and 732 is selected to achieve the desired I component of the output signal 782. DACs 730 and 732 are controlled by DAC clock signals 723 and 725, respectively. DAC clock signals 723 and 725 may be derived from a same clock signal or may be independent.
In another embodiment, signals 722 and 724 are analog signals, and DACs 730 and 732 are not required.
In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 7A, DACs 730 and 732 convert digital information signals 722 and 724 into corresponding analog signals, and input these analog signals into optional interpolation filters 731 and 733, respectively. Interpolation filters 731 and 733, which also serve as anti-aliasing filters, shape the DACs outputs to produce the desired output waveform. Interpolation filters 731 and 733 generate signals 740 and 742, respectively. Signal 741 represents the inverse of signal 740. Signals 740-742 are input into vector modulators 760 and 762.
Vector modulators 760 and 762 multiply signals 740-742 with appropriately phased clock signals to generate constant envelope constituents of I information signal 702. The clock signals are derived from a channel clock signal 708 having a rate according to a desired output signal frequency. A plurality of phase splitters, such as 750 and 752, for example, and phasors associated with the vector modulator multipliers may be used to generate the appropriately phased clock signals.
In the embodiment of FIG. 7A, for example, vector modulator 760 modulates a 90° shifted channel clock signal with quadrature amplitude information signal 740. In parallel, vector modulator 760 modulates an in-phase channel clock signal with in-phase amplitude information signal 742. Vector modulator 760 combines the two modulated signals to generate a first modulated constant envelope constituent 761 of I information signal 702. Similarly, vector modulator 762 generates a second modulated constant envelope constituent 763 of I information signal 702, using signals 741 and 742. Signals 761 and 763 correspond, respectively, to the IU(t) and IL(t) constant envelope components described with reference to FIG. 5.
In parallel and in similar fashion, the Q branch of vector power amplifier 700 generates at least two constant envelope constituent signals of quadrature (Q) information signal 704.
In the embodiment of FIG. 7A, for example, vector modulator 764 generates a first constant envelope constituent 765 of Q information signal 704, using signals 744 and 746. Similarly, vector modulator 766 generates a second constant envelope constituent 767 of Q information signal 704, using signals 745 and 746.
As described above with respect to FIG. 5, constituent signals 761, 763, 765, and 767 have substantially equal and constant magnitude envelopes. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 7A, signals 761, 763, 765, and 767 are, respectively, input into corresponding power amplifiers (PAs) 770, 772, 774, and 776. PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776 can be linear or non-linear power amplifiers. In an embodiment, PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776 include switching power amplifiers.
Circuitry 714 and 716 (herein referred to as “autobias circuitry” for ease of reference, and not limitation) and in this embodiment, control the bias of PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776 according to I and Q information signals 702 and 704. In the embodiment of FIG. 7A, autobias circuitry 714 and 716 provide, respectively, bias signals 715 and 717 to PAs 770, 772 and PAs 774, 776. Autobias circuitry 714 and 716 are further described below in section 3.5. Embodiments of PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776 are also discussed below in section 3.5.
In an embodiment, PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776 apply substantially equal power amplification to respective substantially constant envelope signals 761, 763, 765, and 767. In other embodiments, PA drivers are additionally employed to provide additional power amplification. In the embodiment of FIG. 7A, PA drivers 794, 795, 796, and 797 are optionally added between respective vector modulators 760, 762, 764 766 and respective PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776, in each branch of vector power amplifier 700.
The outputs of PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776 are coupled together to generate output signal 782 of vector power amplifier 700. In an embodiment, the outputs of PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776 are directly coupled together using a wire. Direct coupling in this manner means that there is minimal or no resistive, inductive, or capacitive isolation between the outputs of PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776. In other words, outputs of PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776, are coupled together without intervening components. Alternatively, in an embodiment, the outputs of PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776 are coupled together indirectly through inductances and/or capacitances that result in low or minimal impedance connections, and/or connections that result in minimal isolation and minimal power loss. Alternatively, outputs of PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776 are coupled using well known combining techniques, such as Wilkinson, hybrid, transformers, or known active combiners. In an embodiment, the PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776 provide integrated amplification and power combining in a single operation. In an embodiment, one or more of the power amplifiers and/or drivers described herein are implemented using multiple input, single output power amplification techniques, examples of which are shown in FIGS. 7B, and 51A-H.
Output signal 782 includes the I and Q characteristics of I and Q information signals 702 and 704. Further, output signal 782 is of the same frequency as that of its constituents, and thus is of the desired up-converted output frequency. In embodiments of vector power amplifier 700, a pull-up impedance 780 is coupled between the output of vector amplifier 700 and a power supply. Output stage embodiments according to power amplification methods and systems of the present invention will be further described below in section 3.5.
In other embodiments of vector power amplifier 700, process detectors are employed to compensate for any process variations in circuitry of the amplifier. In the embodiment of FIG. 7A for example, process detectors 791-793 are optionally added to monitor variations in PA drivers 794-797 and phase splitter 750. In further embodiments, frequency compensation circuitry 799 may be employed to compensate for frequency variations.
FIG. 7B is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of vector power amplifier 700. Optional components are illustrated with dashed lines, although other embodiments may have more or less optional components.
The embodiment illustrates a multiple-input single-output (MISO) implementation of the amplifier of FIG. 7A. In the embodiment of FIG. 7B, constant envelope signals 761, 763, 765 and 767, output from vector modulators 760, 762, 764, and 766, are input into MISO PAs 784 and 786. MISO PAs 784 and 786 are two-input single-output power amplifiers. In an embodiment, MISO PAs 784 and 786 include elements 770, 772, 774, 776, 794-797 as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 7A or functional equivalence thereof. In another embodiment, MISO PAs 784 and 786 may include other elements, such as optional pre-drivers and optional process detection circuitry. Further, MISO PAs 784 and 786 are not limited to being two-input PAs as shown in FIG. 7B. In other embodiments as will be described further below with reference to FIGS. 51A-H, PAs 784 and 786 can have any number of inputs and outputs.
FIG. 8A is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment 800A of a vector power amplifier according to the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA method shown in FIG. 6. Optional components are illustrated with dashed lines, although other embodiments may have more or less optional components.
In the embodiment of FIG. 8A, a DAC 830 of sufficient resolution and sample rate replaces DACs 730, 732, 734, and 736 of the embodiment of FIG. 7A. DAC 830's sample rate is controlled by a DAC clock signal 826.
DAC 830 receives in-phase and quadrature information signals 810 and 820 from I Data Transfer Function module 710 and Q Data Transfer Function module 712, respectively, as described above. In an embodiment, a input selector 822 selects the order of signals 810 and 820 being input into DAC 830.
DAC 830 may output a single analog signal at a time. In an embodiment, a sample and hold architecture may be used to ensure proper signal timing to the four branches of the amplifier, as shown in FIG. 8A.
DAC 830 sequentially outputs analog signals 832, 834, 836, 838 to a first set of sample-and-hold circuits 842, 844, 846, and 848. In an embodiment, DAC 830 is clocked at a sufficient rate to emulate the operation of DACs 730, 732, 734, and 736 of the embodiment of FIG. 7A. An output selector 824 determines which of output signals 832, 834, 836, and 838 should be selected for output.
DAC 830's DAC clock signal 826, output selector signal 824, input selector 822, and sample-and-hold clocks 840A-D, and 850 are controlled by a control module that can be independent or integrated into transfer function modules 710 and/or 712.
In an embodiment, sample-and-hold circuits (S/H) 842, 844, 846, and 848 sample and hold the received analog values from DAC 830 according to a clock signals 840A-D. Sample-and-hold circuits 852, 854, 856, and 858 sample and hold the analog values from sample and hold circuits 842, 844, 846, and 848 respectively. In turn, sample-and-hold circuits 852, 854, 856, and 858 hold the received analog values, and simultaneously release the values to vector modulators 760, 762, 764, and 766 according to a common clock signal 850. In another embodiment, sample-and-hold circuits 852, 854, 856, and 858 release the values to optional interpolation filters 731, 733, 735, and 737 which are also anti-aliasing filters. In an embodiment, a common clock signal 850 is used in order to ensure that the outputs of S/H 852, 854, 856, and 858 are time-aligned.
Other aspects of vector power amplifier 800A substantially correspond to those described above with respect to vector power amplifier 700.
FIG. 8B is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment 800B of a vector power amplifier according to the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA method shown in FIG. 6. Optional components are illustrated with dashed lines, although other embodiments may have more or less optional components.
Embodiment 800B illustrates another single DAC implementation of the vector power amplifier. However, in contrast to the embodiment of FIG. 8A, the sample and hold architecture includes a single set of sample-and-hold (S/H) circuits. As shown in FIG. 8B, S/H 842, 844, 846, and 848 receive analog values from DAC 830, illustrated as signals 832, 834, 836, and 838. Each of S/H circuits 842, 844, 846 and 848 release its received value according to a different clock 840A-D as shown. The time difference between analog samples used for to generate signals 740, 741, 742, 744, 745, and 746 can be compensated for in transfer functions 710 and 712. According to the embodiment of FIG. 8B, one level of S/H circuitry can be eliminated relative to the embodiment of FIG. 8A, thereby reducing the size and the complexity of the amplifier.
Other aspects of vector power amplifier 800B substantially correspond to those described above with respect to vector power amplifiers 700 and 800A.
FIG. 8C is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment 800C of vector power amplifier 700. Optional components are illustrated with dashed lines, although other embodiments may have more or less optional components. The embodiment of FIG. 8C illustrates a multiple-input single-output (MISO) implementation of the amplifier of FIG. 8A. In the embodiment of FIG. 8C, constant envelope signals 761, 763, 765 and 767, output from vector modulators 760, 762, 764, and 766, are input into MISO PAs 860 and 862. MISO PAs 860 and 862 are two-input single-output power amplifiers. In an embodiment, MISO PAs 860 and 862 include elements 770, 772, 774, 776, 794-797 as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 7A or functional equivalence thereof. In another embodiment, MISO PAs 860 and 862 may include other elements, such as optional pre-drivers and optional process detection circuitry. In another embodiment, MISO PAs 860 and 862 may include other elements, such as pre-drivers, not shown in the embodiment of FIG. 7A. Further, MISO PAs 860 and 862 are not limited to being two-input PAs as shown in FIG. 8C. In other embodiments as will be described further below with reference to FIGS. 51A-H, PAs 860 and 862 can have any number of inputs and outputs.
Other aspects of vector power amplifier 800C substantially correspond to those described above with respect to vector power amplifiers 700 and 800A.
FIG. 8D is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment 800D of vector power amplifier 700. Optional components are illustrated with dashed lines, although other embodiments may have more or less optional components. The embodiment of FIG. 8D illustrates a multiple-input single-output (MISO) implementation of the amplifier of FIG. 8B. In the embodiment of FIG. 8D, constant envelope signals 761, 763, 765 and 767, output from vector modulators 760, 762, 764, and 766, are input into MISO PAs 870 and 872. MISO PAs 870 and 872 are two-input single-output power amplifiers. In an embodiment, MISO PAs 870 and 872 include elements 770, 772, 774, 776, 794-797 as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 7A or functional equivalence thereof. In another embodiment, MISO PAs 870 and 872 may include other elements, such as optional pre-drivers and optional process detection circuitry. In another embodiment, MISO PAs 870 and 872 may include other elements, such as pre-drivers, not shown in the embodiment of FIG. 7A. Further, MISO PAs 870 and 872 are not limited to being two-input PAs as shown in FIG. 8D. In other embodiments as will be described further below with reference to FIGS. 51A-H, PAs 870 and 872 can have any number of inputs and outputs.
Other aspects of vector power amplifier 800D substantially correspond to those described above with respect to vector power amplifiers 700 and 800B.
3.2) Cartesian-Polar-Cartesian-Polar 2-Branch Vector Power Amplifier
A Cartesian-Polar-Cartesian-Polar (CPCP) 2-Branch VPA embodiment shall now be described (The name of this embodiment is provided for ease of reference, and is not limiting).
According to the Cartesian-Polar-Cartesian-Polar (CPCP) 2-Branch VPA method, a time-varying complex envelope signal is decomposed into 2 substantially constant envelope constituent signals. The constituent signals are individually amplified, and then summed to construct an amplified version of the original time-varying complex envelope signal. In addition, the phase angle of the time-varying complex envelope signal is determined and the resulting summation of the constituent signals are phase shifted by the appropriate angle.
In one embodiment of the CPCP 2-Branch VPA method, a magnitude and a phase angle of a time-varying complex envelope signal are calculated from in-phase and quadrature components of a signal. Given the magnitude information, two substantially constant envelope constituents are calculated from a normalized version of the desired time-varying envelope signal, wherein the normalization includes implementation specific manipulation of phase and/or amplitude. The two substantially constant envelope constituents are then phase shifted by an appropriate angle related to the phase shift of the desired time-varying envelope signal. The substantially constant envelope constituents are then individually amplified substantially equally, and summed to generate an amplified version of the original desired time-varying envelope signal.
FIGS. 9A and 9B conceptually illustrate the CPCP 2-Branch VPA embodiment using a phasor signal representation. In FIG. 9A, phasor {right arrow over (Rin)} represents a time-varying complex envelope input signal r(t). At any instant of time, {right arrow over (Rin)} reflects a magnitude and a phase shift angle of signal r(t). In the example shown in FIG. 9A, {right arrow over (Rin)} is characterized by a magnitude R and a phase shift angle θ. As described above, the phase shift angle is measured relative to a reference signal.
Referring to FIG. 9A, {right arrow over (R′)} represents the relative amplitude component of {right arrow over (R)}in generated by {right arrow over (U)}′ and {right arrow over (L)}′.
Still referring to FIG. 9A, it is noted that, at any time instant, {right arrow over (R′)} can be obtained by the sum of an upper phasor {right arrow over (U′)} and a lower phasor {right arrow over (L′)}. Further, {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)} can be maintained to have substantially constant magnitude. The phasors, {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)}, accordingly, represent two substantially constant envelope signals. r′(t) can thus be obtained, at any time instant, by the sum of two substantially constant envelope signals that correspond to phasors {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)}.
The phase shifts of phasors {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)} relative to {right arrow over (R′)} are set according to the desired magnitude R of {right arrow over (R′)}. In the simplest case, when upper and lower phasors {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)} are selected to have equal magnitude, upper and lower phasors {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)} are substantially symmetrically shifted in phase relative to {right arrow over (R′)}. This is illustrated in the example of FIG. 9A. It is noted that terms and phrases indicating or suggesting orientation, such as but not limited to “upper and lower” are used herein for ease of reference and are not functionally or structurally limiting.
It can be verified that, for the case illustrated in FIG. 9A, the phase shift of {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)} relative to {right arrow over (R′)}, illustrated as angle




  φ
  2




in FIG. 9A, is related to the magnitude of {right arrow over (R′)} as follows:





  
    
      
        
          φ
          2
        
        =
        
          
            cot
            
              -
              1
            
          
          (
          
            R
            
              2
              ⁢
              
                
                  1
                  -
                  
                    
                      R
                      2
                    
                    4
                  
                
              
            
          
          )
        
      
    
    
      
        (
        7
        )
      
    
  




where R represents a normalized magnitude of phasor {right arrow over (R′)}.

Equation (7) can further be reduced to




  
    
      
        
          φ
          2
        
        =
        
          
            cos
            
              -
              1
            
          
          ⁡
          
            (
            
              R
              2
            
            )
          
        
      
    
    
      
        (
        7.10
        )
      
    
  




where R represents a normalized magnitude of phasor {right arrow over (R′)}.

Alternatively, any substantially equivalent mathematical equations or other substantially equivalent mathematical techniques such as look up tables can be used.
It follows from the above discussion that, in phasor representation, any phasor {right arrow over (R′)} of variable magnitude and phase can be constructed by the sum of two constant magnitude phasor components:

{right arrow over (R′)}={right arrow over (U′)}+{right arrow over (L′)}

|{right arrow over (U)}|=|{right arrow over (L)}|=A=constant  (8)

Correspondingly, in the time domain, a time-varying envelope sinusoidal signal r′(t)=R(t)×cos(ωt) is constructed by the sum of two constant envelope signals as follows:




  
    
      
        
          
            
              
                r
                ′
              
              ⁡
              
                (
                t
                )
              
            
            =
            
              
                
                  U
                  ′
                
                ⁡
                
                  (
                  t
                  )
                
              
              +
              
                
                  L
                  ′
                
                ⁡
                
                  (
                  t
                  )
                
              
            
          
          ;
        
        ⁢
        
          

        
        ⁢
        
          
            
              
                U
                ′
              
              ⁡
              
                (
                t
                )
              
            
            =
            
              A
              ×
              
                cos
                ⁡
                
                  (
                  
                    
                      ω
                      ⁢
                      
                        
                      
                      ⁢
                      t
                    
                    +
                    
                      φ
                      2
                    
                  
                  )
                
              
            
          
          ;
        
        ⁢
        
          

        
        ⁢
        
          
            
              
                L
                ′
              
              ⁡
              
                (
                t
                )
              
            
            =
            
              A
              ×
              
                cos
                ⁡
                
                  (
                  
                    
                      ω
                      ⁢
                      
                        
                      
                      ⁢
                      t
                    
                    -
                    
                      φ
                      2
                    
                  
                  )
                
              
            
          
          ;
        
      
    
    
      
        (
        9
        )
      
    
  




where A is a constant and





  φ
  2




is as shown in equation (7).

From FIG. 9A, it can be further verified that equations (9) can be rewritten as:

r′(t)=U′(t)+L′(t);

U′(t)=C cos(ωt)+α sin(ωt);

L′(t)=C cos(ωt)−β sin(ωt);  (10)

where C denotes the real part component of phasors {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)} and is equal to





  A
  ×
  
    
      cos
      ⁡
      
        (
        
          φ
          2
        
        )
      
    
    .
  




Note that C is a common component of {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)}. α and β denote the imaginary part components of phasors {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)}, respectively.





  α
  =
  
    β
    =
    
      A
      ×
      
        
          sin
          ⁡
          
            (
            
              φ
              2
            
            )
          
        
        .
      
    
  




Accordingly, from equations (12),





  
    
      r
      ′
    
    ⁡
    
      (
      t
      )
    
  
  =
  
    
      2
      ⁢
      
        
      
      ⁢
      C
      ×
      
        cos
        ⁡
        
          (
          
            ω
            ⁢
            
              
            
            ⁢
            t
          
          )
        
      
    
    =
    
      2
      ⁢
      
        
      
      ⁢
      A
      ×
      
        cos
        ⁡
        
          (
          
            φ
            2
          
          )
        
      
      ×
      
        
          cos
          ⁡
          
            (
            
              ω
              ⁢
              
                
              
              ⁢
              t
            
            )
          
        
        .
      
    
  




As understood by a person skilled in the art based on the teachings herein, other equivalent and/or simplified representations of the above representations of the quantities A, B, and C may also be used, including look up tables, for example.

Note that {right arrow over (Rin)}, is shifted by θ degrees relative to {right arrow over (R′)}. Accordingly, using equations (8), it can be deduced that:

{right arrow over (Rin)}={right arrow over (R′)}ejθ=({right arrow over (U′)}+{right arrow over (L′)})ejθ={right arrow over (U′)}ejθ+{right arrow over (L′)}ejθ  (11)

Equations (11) imply that a representation of {right arrow over (Rin)} can be obtained by summing phasors {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)}, described above, shifted by θ degrees. Further, an amplified output version, {right arrow over (Rout)} of {right arrow over (Rin)} can be obtained by separately amplifying substantially equally each of the θ degrees shifted versions of phasors {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)}, and summing them. FIG. 9B illustrates this concept. In FIG. 9B, phasors {right arrow over (U)} and {right arrow over (L)} represent θ degrees shifted and amplified versions of phasors {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)}. Note that, since {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)} are constant magnitude phasors, {right arrow over (U)} and {right arrow over (L)} are also constant magnitude phasors. Phasors {right arrow over (U)} and {right arrow over (L)} sum, as shown FIG. 9B, to phasor {right arrow over (Rout)}, which is a power amplified version of input signal {right arrow over (Rin)}.
Equivalently, in the time domain, it can be shown that:

rout(t)=U(t)+L(t);

U(t)=K[C cos(ωt+θ)+α sin(ωt+θ)];

L(t)=K[C cos(ωt+θ)=β sin(ωt+θ)].  (12)

where rout(t) corresponds to the time domain signal represented by phasor {right arrow over (Rout)}, U(t) and L(t) correspond to the time domain signals represents by phasors {right arrow over (U)} and {right arrow over (L)}, and K is the power amplification factor.

A person skilled in the art will appreciate that, whereas the time domain representations in equations (9) and (10) have been provided for the case of a sinusoidal waveform, equivalent representations can be developed for non-sinusoidal waveforms using appropriate basis functions.
FIG. 10 is a block diagram that conceptually illustrates an exemplary embodiment 1000 of the CPCP 2-Branch VPA embodiment. An output signal r(t) of desired power level and frequency characteristics is generated from in-phase and quadrature components according to the CPCP 2-Branch VPA embodiment.
In the example of FIG. 10, a clock signal 1010 represents a reference signal for generating output signal r(t). Clock signal 1010 is of the same frequency as that of desired output signal r(t).
Referring to FIG. 10, an Iclk_phase signal 1012 and a Qclk_phase signal 1014 represent amplitude analog values that are multiplied by the in-phase and quadrature components of Clk signal 1010 and are calculated from the baseband I and Q signals.
Still referring to FIG. 10, clock signal 1010 is multiplied with Iclk_phase signal 1012. In parallel, a 90° degrees shifted version of clock signal 1010 is multiplied with Qclk_phase signal 1014. The two multiplied signals are combined to generate Rclk signal 1016. Rclk signal 1016 is of the same frequency as clock signal 1010. Further, Rclk signal 1016 is characterized by a phase shift angle according to the ratio of Q(t) and I(t). The magnitude of Rclk signal 1016 is such that R2clk=I2clk_phase+Q2clk_phase. Accordingly, Rclk signal 1016 represents a substantially constant envelope signal having the phase characteristics of the desired output signal r(t).
Still referring to FIG. 10, Rclk signal 1016 is input, in parallel, into two vector modulators 1060 and 1062. Vector modulators 1060 and 1062 generate the U(t) and L(t) substantially constant envelope constituents, respectively, of the desired output signal r(t) as described in (12). In vector modulator 1060, an in-phase Rclk signal 1020, multiplied with Common signal 1028, is combined with a 90° degree shifted version 1018 of Rclk signal, multiplied with first signal 1026. In parallel, in vector modulator 1062, an in-phase Rclk signal 1022, multiplied with Common signal 1028, is combined with a 90° degrees shifted version 1024 of Rclk signal, multiplied with second signal 1030. Common signal 1028, first signal 1026, and second signal 1030 correspond, respectively, to the real part C and the imaginary parts α and β described in equation (12).
Output signals 1040 and 1042 of respective vector modulators 1060 and 1062 correspond, respectively, to the U(t) and L(t) constant envelope constituents of input signal r(t).
As described above, signals 1040 and 1042 are characterized by having substantially equal and constant magnitude envelopes. Accordingly, when signals 1040 and 1042 are input into corresponding power amplifiers (PA) 1044 and 1046, corresponding amplified signals 1048 and 1050 are substantially constant envelope signals.
Power amplifiers 1044 and 1046 apply substantially equal power amplification to signals 1040 and 1042, respectively. In an embodiment, the power amplification level of PAs 1044 and 1046 is set according to the desired power level of output signal r(t). Further, amplified signals 1048 and 1050 are in-phase relative to each other. Accordingly, when summed together, as shown in FIG. 10, resulting signal 1052 corresponds to the desired output signal r(t).
FIG. 10A is another exemplary embodiment 1000A of the CPCP 2-Branch VPA embodiment. Embodiment 1000A represents a Multiple Input Single Output (MISO) implementation of embodiment 1000 of FIG. 10.
In embodiment 1000A, constant envelope signals 1040 and 1042, output from vector modulators 1060 and 1062, are input into MISO PA 1054. MISO PA 1054 is a two-input single-output power amplifier. In an embodiment, MISO PA 1054 may include various elements, such as pre-drivers, drivers, power amplifiers, and process detectors (not shown in FIG. 10A), for example. Further, MISO PA 1054 is not limited to being a two-input PA as shown in FIG. 10A. In other embodiments, as will be described further below with reference to FIGS. 51A-H, PA 1054 can have any number of inputs.
Operation of the CPCP 2-Branch VPA embodiment is depicted in the process flowchart 1100 of FIG. 11.
The process begins at step 1110, which includes receiving a baseband representation of the desired output signal. In an embodiment, this involves receiving in-phase (I) and quadrature (Q) components of the desired output signal. In another embodiment, this involves receiving magnitude and phase of the desired output signal.
Step 1120 includes receiving a clock signal set according to a desired output signal frequency of the desired output signal. In the example of FIG. 10, step 1120 is achieved by receiving clock signal 1010.
Step 1130 includes processing the clock signal to generate a normalized clock signal having a phase shift angle according to the received I and Q components. In an embodiment, the normalized clock signal is a constant envelope signal having a phase shift angle according to a ratio of the I and Q components. The phase shift angle of the normalized clock is relative to the original clock signal. In the example of FIG. 10, step 1130 is achieved by multiplying clock signal 1010's in-phase and quadrature components with Iclk_phase 1012 and Qclk_phase 1014 signals, and then summing the multiplied signal to generate Rclk signal 1016.
Step 1140 includes the processing of the I and Q components to generate the amplitude information required to produce first and second substantially constant envelope constituent signals.
Step 1150 includes processing the amplitude information of step 1140 and the normalized clock signal Rclk to generate the first and second constant envelope constituents of the desired output signal. In an embodiment, step 1150 involves phase shifting the first and second constant envelope constituents of the desired output signal by the phase shift angle of the normalized clock signal. In the example of FIG. 10, step 1150 is achieved by vector modulators 1060 and 1062 modulating Rclk signal 1016 with first signal 1026, second signal 1030, and common signal 1028 to generate signals 1040 and 1042.
Step 1160 includes individually amplifying the first and second constant envelope constituents, and summing the amplified signals to generate the desired output signal. In an embodiment, the amplification of the first and second constant envelope constituents is substantially equal and according to a desired power level of the desired output signal. In the example of FIG. 10, step 1160 is achieved by PAs 1044 and 1046 amplifying signals 1040 and 1042 to generate amplified signals 1048 and 1050.
FIG. 12 is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier 1200 implementing the process flowchart 1100. Optional components are illustrated with dashed lines, although in other embodiments more or less components may be optional.
Referring to FIG. 12, in-phase (I) and quadrature (Q) information signal 1210 is received by an I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1216. In an embodiment, I and Q Data Transfer Function 1216 samples signal 1210 according to a sample clock 1212. I and Q information signal 1210 includes baseband I and Q information of a desired output signal r(t).
In an embodiment, I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1216 processes information signal 1210 to generate information signals 1220, 1222, 1224, and 1226. The operation of I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1216 is further described below in section 3.4.
Referring to FIG. 12, information signal 1220 includes quadrature amplitude information of first and second constant envelope constituents of a baseband version of desired output signal r(t). With reference to FIG. 9A, for example, information signal 1220 includes the α and β quadrature components. Referring again to FIG. 12, information signal 1226 includes in-phase amplitude information of the first and second constant envelope constituents of the baseband version of signal r(t). With reference to FIG. 9A, for example, information signal 1226 includes the common C in-phase component.
Still referring to FIG. 12, information signals 1222 and 1224 include normalized in-phase Iclk_phase and quadrature Qclk_phase signals, respectively. Iclk_phase and Qclk_phase are normalized versions of the I and Q information signals included in signal 1210. In an embodiment, Iclk_phase and Qclk_phase are normalized such that that (I2clk_phase+Q2clk_phase=constant). It is noted that the phase of signal 1250 corresponds to the phase of the desired output signal and is created from Iclk_phase and Qclk_phase. Referring to FIG. 9B, Iclk_phase and Qclk_phase are related to I and Q as follows:




  
    
      
        θ
        =
        
          
            
              tan
              
                -
                1
              
            
            ⁡
            
              (
              
                Q
                I
              
              )
            
          
          =
          
            
              tan
              
                -
                1
              
            
            ⁡
            
              (
              
                
                  Q
                  clk_phase
                
                
                  I
                  clk_phase
                
              
              )
            
          
        
      
    
    
      
        (
        12.1
        )
      
    
  




where θ represents the phase of the desired output signal, represented b

phasor {right arrow over (Rout)} in FIG. 9B. The sign information of the baseband I and Q information must be taken into account to calculate θ for all four quadrants.

In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 12, information signals 1220, 1222, 1224, and 1226 are digital signals. Accordingly, each of signals 1220, 1222, 1224, and 1226 is fed into a corresponding digital-to-analog converter (DAC) 1230, 1232, 1234, and 1236. The resolution and sample rate of DACs 1230, 1232, 1234, and 1236 is selected according to specific signaling schemes. DACs 1230, 1232, 1234, and 1236 are controlled by DAC clock signals 1221, 1223, 1225, and 1227, respectively. DAC clock signals 1221, 1223, 1225, and 1227 may be derived from a same clock signal or may be independent.
In other embodiments, information signals 1220, 1222, 1224, and 1226 are generated in analog format and no DACs are required.
Referring to FIG. 12, DACs 1230, 1232, 1234, and 1236 convert digital information signals 1220, 1222, 1224, and 1226 into corresponding analog signals, and input these analog signal into optional interpolation filters 1231, 1233, 1235, and 1237, respectively. Interpolation filters 1231, 1233, 1235, and 1237, which also serve as anti-aliasing filters, shape the DACs output signals to produce the desired output waveform. Interpolation filters 1231, 1233, 1235, and 1237 generate signals 1240, 1244, 1246, and 1248, respectively. Signal 1242 represents the inverse of signal 1240.
Still referring to FIG. 12, signals 1244 and 1246, which include Iclk_phase and Qclk_phase information, are input into a vector modulator 1238. Vector modulator 1238 multiplies signal 1244 with a channel clock signal 1214. Channel clock signal 1214 is selected according to a desired output signal frequency. In parallel, vector modulator 1238 multiplies signal 1246 with a 90° shifted version of channel clock signal 1214. In other words, vector modulator 1238 generates an in-phase component having amplitude of Iclk_phase and a quadrature component having amplitude of Qclk_phase.
Vector modulator 1238 combines the two modulated signals to generate Rclk signal 1250. Rclk signal 1250 is a substantially constant envelope signal having the desired output frequency and a phase shift angle according to the I and Q data included in signal 1210.
Still referring to FIG. 12, signals 1240, 1242, and 1248 include the U, L, and Common C amplitude components, respectively, of the complex envelope of signal r(t). Signals 1240, 1242, and 1248 along with Rclk signal 1250 are input into vector modulators 1260 and 1262.
Vector modulator 1260 combines signal 1240, multiplied with a 90° shifted version of Rclk signal 1250, and signal 1248, multiplied with a 0° shifted version of Rclk signal 1250, to generate output signal 1264. In parallel, vector modulator 1262 combines signal 1242, multiplied with a 90° shifted version of Rclk signal 1250, and signal 1248, modulated with a 0° shifted version of Rclk signal 1250, to generate output signal 1266.
Output signals 1264 and 1266 represent substantially constant envelope signals. Further, phase shifts of output signals 1264 and 1266 relative to Rclk signal 1250 are determined by the angle relationships associated with the ratios α/C and β/C, respectively. In an embodiment, α=−β and therefore output signals 1264 and 1266 are symmetrically phased relative to Rclk signal 1250. With reference to FIG. 9B, for example, output signals 1264 and 1266 correspond, respectively, to the {right arrow over (U)} and {right arrow over (L)} constant magnitude phasors.
A sum of output signals 1264 and 1266 results in a channel-clock-modulated signal having the I and Q characteristics of baseband signal r(t). To achieve a desired power level at the output of vector power amplifier 1200, however, signals 1264 and 1266 are amplified to generate an amplified output signal. In the embodiment of FIG. 12, signals 1264 and 1266 are, respectively, input into power amplifiers (PAs) 1270 and 1272 and amplified. In an embodiment, PAs 1270 and 1272 include switching power amplifiers. Autobias circuitry 1218 controls the bias of PAs 1270 and 1272 as further described below in section 3.5.2. In the embodiment of FIG. 12, for example, autobias circuitry 1218 provides a bias voltage 1228 to PAs 1270 and 1272.
In an embodiment, PAs 1270 and 1272 apply substantially equal power amplification to respective constant envelope signals 1264-1266. In an embodiment, the power amplification is set according to the desired output power level. In other embodiments of vector power amplifier 1200, PA drivers and/or pre-drivers are additionally employed to provide additional power amplification capability to the amplifier. In the embodiment of FIG. 12, for example, PA drivers 1284 and 1286 are optionally added, respectively, between vector modulators 1260 and 1262 and subsequent PAs 1270 and 1272.
Respective output signals 1274 and 1276 of PAs 1270 and 1272 are substantially constant envelope signals. Further, when output signals 1274 and 1276 are summed, the resulting signal has minimal non-linear distortion. In the embodiment of FIG. 12, output signals 1274 and 1276 are coupled together to generate output signal 1280 of vector power amplifier 1200. In an embodiment, no isolation is used in coupling the outputs of PAs 1270 and 1272. Accordingly, minimal power loss is incurred by the coupling. In an embodiment, the outputs of PAs 1270 and 1272 are directly coupled together using a wire. Direct coupling in this manner means that there is minimal or no resistive, inductive, or capacitive isolation between the outputs of PAs 1270 and 1272. In other words, outputs of PAs 1270 and 1272 are coupled together without intervening components. Alternatively, in an embodiment, the outputs of PAs 1270 and 1272 are coupled together indirectly through inductances and/or capacitances that result in low or minimal impedance connections, and/or connections that result in minimal isolation and minimal power loss. Alternatively, outputs of PAs 1270 and 1272 are coupled using well known combining techniques, such as Wilkinson, hybrid combiners, transformers, or known active combiners. In an embodiment, the PAs 1270 and 1272 provide integrated amplification and power combining in a single operation. In an embodiment, one or more of the power amplifiers and/or drivers described herein are implemented using multiple input, single output power amplification techniques, examples of which are shown in FIGS. 12A, 12B, and 51A-H.
Output signal 1280 represents a signal having the I and Q characteristics of baseband signal r(t) and the desired output power level and frequency. In embodiments of vector power amplifier 1200, a pull-up impedance 1288 is coupled between the output of vector power amplifier 1200 and a power supply. In other embodiments, an impedance matching network 1290 is coupled at the output of vector power amplifier 1200. Output stage embodiments according to power amplification methods and systems of the present invention will be further described below in section 3.5.
In other embodiments of vector power amplifier 1200, process detectors are employed to compensate for any process variations in circuitry of the amplifier. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 12, for example, process detector 1282 is optionally added to monitor variations in PA drivers 1284 and 1286.
FIG. 12A is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier 1200A implementing the process flowchart 1100. Optional components are illustrated with dashed lines, although in other embodiments more or less components may be optional.
Embodiment 1200A illustrates a multiple-input single-output (MISO) implementation of embodiment 1200. In embodiment 1200A, constant envelope signals 1261 and 1263, output from vector modulators 1260 and 1262, are input into MISO PA 1292. MISO PA 1292 is a two-input single-output power amplifier. In an embodiment, MISO PA 1292 includes elements 1270, 1272, 1282, 1284, and 1286 as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 12. In another embodiment, MISO PA 1292 may include other elements, such as pre-drivers, not shown in the embodiment of FIG. 12. Further, MISO PA 1292 is not limited to being a two-input PA as shown in FIG. 12A. In other embodiments as will be described further below with reference to FIGS. 51A-H, PA 1292 can have any number of inputs and outputs.
Still referring to FIG. 12A, embodiment 1200A illustrates one implementation for delivering autobias signals to MISO PA 1292. In the embodiment of FIG. 12A, Autobias signal 1228 generated by Autobias circuitry 1218, has one or more signals derived from it to bias different stages of MISO PA 1292. As shown in the example of FIG. 12A, three bias control signals Bias A, Bias B, and Bias C are derived from Autobias signal 1228, and then input at different stages of MISO PA 1292. For example, Bias C may be the bias signal to the pre-driver stage of MISO PA 1292. Similarly, Bias B and Bias A may be the bias signals to the driver and PA stages of MISO PA 1292.
In another implementation, shown in embodiment 1200B of FIG. 12 B, Autobias circuitry 1218 generates separate Autobias signals 1295, 1296, and 1295, corresponding to Bias A, Bias B, and Bias C, respectively. Signals 1295, 1296, and 1297 may or may not be generated separately within Autobias circuitry 1218, but are output separately as shown. Further, signals 1295, 1296, and 1297 may or may not be related as determined by the biasing of the different stages of MISO PA 1294.
Other aspects of vector power amplifiers 1200A and 1200B substantially correspond to those described above with respect to vector power amplifier 1200.
FIG. 13 is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment 1300 of a vector power amplifier according to the CPCP 2-Branch VPA embodiment. Optional components are illustrated with dashed lines, although in other embodiments more or less components may be optional.
In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 13, a DAC of sufficient resolution and sample rate 1320 replaces DACs 1230, 1232, 1234 and 1236 of the embodiment of FIG. 12. DAC 1320 is controlled by a DAC clock 1324.
DAC 1320 receives information signal 1310 from I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1216. Information signal 1310 includes identical information content to signals 1220, 1222, 1224 and 1226 in the embodiment of FIG. 12.
DAC 1320 may output a single analog signal at a time. Accordingly, a sample-and-hold architecture may be used as shown in FIG. 13.
DAC 1320 sequentially outputs analog signals 1332, 1334, 1336, 1336 to a first set of sample-and-hold circuits 1342, 1344, 1346, and 1348. In an embodiment, DAC 1230 is clocked at a sufficient rate to replace DACs 1230, 1232, 1234, and 1236 of the embodiment of FIG. 12. An output selector 1322 determines which of output signals 1332, 1334, 1336, and 1338 should be selected for output.
DAC 1320's DAC clock signal 1324, output selector signal 1322, and sample-and-hold clocks 1340A-D and 1350 are controlled by a control module that can be independent or integrated into transfer function module 1216.
In an embodiment, sample-and-hold circuits (S/H) 1342, 1344, 1346, and 1348 hold the received analog values and, according to a clock signal 1340A-D, release the values to a second set of sample-and-hold circuits 1352, 1354, 1356, and 1358. For example, S/H 1342 release its value to S/H 1352 according to a received clock signal 1340A. In turn, sample-and-hold circuits 1352, 1354, 1356, and 1358 hold the received analog values, and simultaneously release the values to interpolation filters 1231, 1233, 1235, and 1237 according to a common clock signal 1350. A common clock signal 1350 is used in order to ensure that the outputs of S/H 1352, 1354, 1356, and 1358 are time-aligned.
In another embodiment, a single layer of S/H circuitry that includes S/H 1342, 1344, 1346, and 1348 can be employed. Accordingly, S/H circuits 1342, 1344, 1346, and 1348 receive analog values from DAC 1320, and each releases its received value according to a clock independent of the others. For example, S/H 1342 is controlled by clock 1340A, which may not be synchronized with clock 1340B that controls S/H 1344. To ensure that outputs of S/H circuits 1342, 1344, 1346, and 1348 are time-aligned, delays between clocks 1340A-D are pre-compensated for in prior stages of the amplifier. For example, DAC 1320 outputs signal 1332, 1334, 1336, and 1338 with appropriately selected delays to S/H circuits 1342, 1344, 1346, and 1348 in order to compensate for the time differences between clocks 1340A-D.
Other aspects of vector power amplifier 1300 are substantially equivalent to those described above with respect to vector power amplifier 1200.
FIG. 13A is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment 1300A of a vector power amplifier according to the CPCP 2-Branch VPA embodiment. Optional components are illustrated with dashed lines, although in other embodiments more or less components may be optional. Embodiment 1300A is a MISO implementation of embodiment 1300 of FIG. 13.
In the embodiment of FIG. 13A, constant envelope signals 1261 and 1263 output from vector modulators 1260 and 1262 are input into MISO PA 1360. MISO PA 1360 is a two-input single-output power amplifier. In an embodiment, MISO PA 1360 includes elements 1270, 1272, 1282, 1284, and 1286 as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 13. In another embodiment, MISO PA 1360 may include other elements, such as pre-drivers, not shown in the embodiment of FIG. 13, or functional equivalents thereof. Further, MISO PA 1360 is not limited to being a two-input PA as shown in FIG. 13A. In other embodiments as will be described further below with reference to FIGS. 51A-H, PA 1360 can have any number of inputs.
The embodiment of FIG. 13A further illustrates two different sample and hold architectures with a single or two levels of S/H circuitry as shown. The two implementations have been described above with respect to FIG. 13.
Embodiment 1300A also illustrates optional bias control circuitry 1218 and associated bias control signal 1325, 1326, and 1327. Signals 1325, 1326, and 1327 may be used to bias different stages of MISO PA 1360 in certain embodiments.
Other aspects of vector power amplifier 1300A are equivalent to those described above with respect to vector power amplifiers 1200 and 1300.
3.3) Direct Cartesian 2-Branch Vector Power Amplifier
A Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA embodiment shall now be described. This name is used herein for reference purposes, and is not functionally or structurally limiting.
According to the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA embodiment, a time-varying envelope signal is decomposed into two constant envelope constituent signals. The constituent signals are individually amplified equally or substantially equally, and then summed to construct an amplified version of the original time-varying envelope signal.
In one embodiment of the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA embodiment, a magnitude and a phase angle of a time-varying envelope signal are calculated from in-phase and quadrature components of an input signal. Using the magnitude and phase information, in-phase and quadrature amplitude components are calculated for two constant envelope constituents of the time-varying envelope signal. The two constant envelope constituents are then generated, amplified equally or substantially equally, and summed to generate an amplified version of the original time-varying envelope signal Rin.
The concept of the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA will now be described with reference to FIGS. 9A and 14.
As described and verified above with respect to FIG. 9A, the phasor {right arrow over (R′)} can be obtained by the sum of an upper phasor {right arrow over (U′)} and a lower phasor {right arrow over (L′)} appropriately phased to produce {right arrow over (R′)}. {right arrow over (R′)} is calculated to be proportional to the magnitude Rin. Further, {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)} can be maintained to have substantially constant magnitude. In the time domain, {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)} represent two substantially constant envelope signals. The time domain equivalent r′(t) of {right arrow over (R′)} can thus be obtained, at any time instant, by the sum of two substantially constant envelope signals.
For the case illustrated in FIG. 9A, the phase shift of {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)} relative to {right arrow over (R′)}, illustrated as angle




  φ
  2




in FIG. 9A, is related to the magnitude of {right arrow over (R′)} as follows:





  
    
      
        
          φ
          2
        
        =
        
          
            cot
            
              -
              1
            
          
          (
          
            R
            
              2
              ⁢
              
                
                  1
                  -
                  
                    
                      R
                      2
                    
                    4
                  
                
              
            
          
          )
        
      
    
    
      
        (
        13
        )
      
    
  




where R represents the normalized magnitude of phasor {right arrow over (R′)}.

In the time domain, it was shown that a time-varying envelope signal, r′(t)=R(t) cos(ωt) for example, can be constructed by the sum of two constant envelope signals as follows:

r′(t)=U′(t)+L′(t);

U′(t)=C×cos(ωt)+α×sin(ωt);

L′(t)=C×cos(ωt)−β×sin(ωt).  (14)

where C denotes the in-phase amplitude component of phasors {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)} and is equal or substantially equal to





  A
  ×
  
    cos
    ⁡
    
      (
      
        φ
        2
      
      )
    
  




(A being a constant). α and β denote the quadrature amplitude components of phasors {right arrow over (U′)} and {right arrow over (L′)}, respectively.





  α
  =
  
    β
    =
    
      A
      ×
      
        
          sin
          ⁡
          
            (
            
              φ
              2
            
            )
          
        
        .
      
    
  




Note that equations (14) can be modified for non-sinusoidal signals by changing the basis function from sinusoidal to the desired function.

FIG. 14 illustrates phasor {right arrow over (R)} and its two constant magnitude constituent phasors {right arrow over (U)} and {right arrow over (L)}. {right arrow over (R)} is shifted by θ degrees relative to {right arrow over (R′)} in FIG. 9A. Accordingly, it can be verified that:

{right arrow over (R)}={right arrow over (R′)}×ejθ=({right arrow over (U′)}+{right arrow over (L′)})×ejθ={right arrow over (U)}+{right arrow over (L)}; 

{right arrow over (U)}={right arrow over (U′)}×ejθ;

{right arrow over (L)}={right arrow over (L′)}×ejθ.  (15)

From equations (15), it can be further shown that:

{right arrow over (U)}={right arrow over (U′)}×ejθ=(C+jα)×ejθ;

{right arrow over (U)}=(C+jα)(cos θ+j sin θ)=(C cos θ−α sin θ)+j(C sin θ+α cos θ).  (16)

Similarly, it can be shown that:

{right arrow over (L)}={right arrow over (L′)}×ejθ=(C+jβ)×ejθ;

{right arrow over (L)}=(C+jβ)(cos θ+j sin θ)=(C cos θ−β sin θ)+j(C sin θ+β cos θ).  (17)

Equations (16) and (17) can be re-written as:

{right arrow over (U)}=(C cos θ−α sin θ)+j(C sin θ+α cos θ)=Ux+jUy;

{right arrow over (L)}=(C cos θ−β sin θ)+j(C sin θ+β cos θ)=Lx+jLy.  (18)

Equivalently, in the time domain:

U(t)=Uxφ1(t)+Uyφ2(t);

L(t)=Lxφ1(t)+Lyφ2(t);  (19)

where φ1(t) and φ2(t) represent an appropriately selected orthogonal basis functions.

From equations (18) and (19), it is noted that it is sufficient to calculate the values of α, β, C and sin(Θ) and cos(Θ) in order to determine the two constant envelope constituents of a time-varying envelope signal r(t). Further, α, β and C can be entirely determined from magnitude and phase information, equivalently I and Q components, of signal r(t).
FIG. 15 is a block diagram that conceptually illustrates an exemplary embodiment 1500 of the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA embodiment. An output signal r(t) of desired power level and frequency characteristics is generated from in-phase and quadrature components according to the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA embodiment.
In the example of FIG. 15, a clock signal 1510 represents a reference signal for generating output signal r(t). Clock signal 1510 is of the same frequency as that of desired output signal r(t).
Referring to FIG. 15, exemplary embodiment 1500 includes a first branch 1572 and a second branch 1574. The first branch 1572 includes a vector modulator 1520 and a power amplifier (PA) 1550. Similarly, the second branch 1574 includes a vector modulator 1530 and a power amplifier (PA) 1560.
Still referring to FIG. 15, clock signal 1510 is input, in parallel, into vector modulators 1520 and 1530. In vector modulator 1520, an in-phase version 1522 of clock signal 1510, multiplied with Ux signal 1526, is summed with a 90° degrees shifted version 1524 of clock signal 1510, multiplied with Uy signal 1528. In parallel, in vector modulator 1530, an in-phase version 1532 of clock signal 1510, multiplied with Lx signal 1536, is summed with a 90° degrees shifted version 1534 of clock signal 1510, multiplied with Ly signal 1538. Ux signal 1526 and Uy signal 1528 correspond, respectively, to the in-phase and quadrature amplitude components of the U(t) constant envelope constituent of signal r(t) provided in equation (19). Similarly, Lx signal 1536, and Ly signal 1538 correspond, respectively, to the in-phase and quadrature amplitude components of the L(t) constant envelope constituent of signal r(t) provided in equation (19).
Accordingly, respective output signals 1540 and 1542 of vector modulators 1520 and 1530 correspond, respectively, to the U(t) and L(t) constant envelope constituents of signal r(t) as described above in equations (19). As described above, signals 1540 and 1542 are characterized by having equal and constant or substantially equal and constant magnitude envelopes.
Referring to FIG. 15, to generate the desired power level of output signal r(t), signals 1540 and 1542 are input into corresponding power amplifiers 1550 and 1560.
In an embodiment, power amplifiers 1550 and 1560 apply equal or substantially equal power amplification to signals 1540 and 1542, respectively. In an embodiment, the power amplification level of PAs 1550 and 1560 is set according to the desired power level of output signal r(t).
Amplified output signals 1562 and 1564 are substantially constant envelope signals. Accordingly, when summed together, as shown in FIG. 15, resulting signal 1570 corresponds to the desired output signal r(t).
FIG. 15A is another exemplary embodiment 1500A of the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA embodiment. Embodiment 1500A represents a Multiple Input Signal Output (MISO) implementation of embodiment 1500 of FIG. 15.
In embodiment 1500A, constant envelope signals 1540 and 1542, output from vector modulators 1520 and 1530, are input into MISO PA 1580. MISO PA 1580 is a two-input single-output power amplifier. In an embodiment, MISO PA 1580 may include various elements, such as pre-drivers, drivers, power amplifiers, and process detectors (not shown in FIG. 15A), for example. Further, MISO PA 1580 is not limited to being a two-input PA as shown in FIG. 15A. In other embodiments, as will be described further below with reference to FIGS. 51A-H, PA 1580 can have any number of inputs.
Operation of the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA embodiment is depicted in the process flowchart 1600 of FIG. 16. The process begins at step 1610, which includes receiving a baseband representation of a desired output signal. In an embodiment, the baseband representation includes I and Q components. In another embodiment, the I and Q components are RF components that are down-converted to baseband.
Step 1620 includes receiving a clock signal set according to a desired output signal frequency of the desired output signal. In the example of FIG. 15, step 1620 is achieved by receiving clock signal 1510.
Step 1630 includes processing the I and Q components to generate in-phase and quadrature amplitude information of first and second constant envelope constituent signals of the desired output signal. In the example of FIG. 15, the in-phase and quadrature amplitude information is illustrated by Ux, Uy, Lx, and Ly.
Step 1640 includes processing the amplitude information and the clock signal to generate the first and second constant envelope constituent signals of the desired output signal. In an embodiment, the first and second constant envelope constituent signals are modulated according to the desired output signal frequency. In the example of FIG. 15, step 1640 is achieved by vector modulators 1520 and 1530, clock signal 1510, and amplitude information signals 1526, 1528, 1536, and 1538 to generate signals 1540 and 1542.
Step 1650 includes amplifying the first and second constant envelope constituents, and summing the amplified signals to generate the desired output signal. In an embodiment, the amplification of the first and second constant envelope constituents is according to a desired power level of the desired output signal. In the example of FIG. 15, step 1650 is achieved by PAs 1550 and 1560 amplifying respective signals 1540 and 1542 and, subsequently, by the summing of amplified signals 1562 and 1564 to generate output signal 1574.
FIG. 17 is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a vector power amplifier 1700 implementing the process flowchart 1600. Optional components are illustrated with dashed lines, although other embodiments may have more or less optional components.
Referring to FIG. 17, in-phase (I) and quadrature (Q) information signal 1710 is received by an I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1716. In an embodiment, I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1716 samples signal 1710 according to a sample clock 1212. I and Q information signal 1710 includes baseband I and Q information.
In an embodiment, I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1716 processes information signal 1710 to generate information signals 1720, 1722, 1724, and 1726. The operation of I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1716 is further described below in section 3.4.
Referring to FIG. 17, information signal 1720 includes vector modulator 1750 quadrature amplitude information that is processed through DAC 1730 to generate signal 1740. Information signal 1722 includes vector modulator 1750 in-phase amplitude information that is processed through DAC 1732 to generate signal 1742. Signals 1740 and 1742 are calculated to generate a substantially constant envelope signal 1754. With reference to FIG. 14, for example, information signals 1720 and 1722 include the upper quadrature and in-phase components Uy and Ux, respectively.
Still referring to FIG. 17, information signal 1726 includes vector modulator 1752 quadrature amplitude information that is processed through DAC 1736 to generate signal 1746. Information signal 1724 includes vector modulator 1752 in-phase amplitude information that is processed through DAC 1734 to generate signal 1744. Signals 1744 and 1746 are calculated to generate a substantially constant envelope signal 1756. With reference to FIG. 14, for example, information signals 1724 and 1726 include the lower in-phase and quadrature components Lx and Ly, respectively.
In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 17, information signals 1720, 1722, 1724 and 1726 are digital signals. Accordingly, each of signals 1720, 1722, 1724 and 1726 is fed into a corresponding digital-to-analog converter (DAC) 1730, 1732, 1734, and 1736. The resolution and sample rates of DACs 1730, 1732, 1734, and 1736 are selected according to the specific desired signaling schemes. DACs 1730, 1732, 1734, and 1736 are controlled by DAC clock signals 1721, 1723, 1725, and 1727, respectively. DAC clock signals 1721, 1723, 1725, and 1727 may be derived from a same clock or may be independent of each other.
In other embodiments, information signals 1720, 1722, 1724 and 1726 are generated in analog format and no DACs are required.
Referring to FIG. 17, DACs 1730, 1732, 1734, and 1736 convert digital information signals 1720, 1722, 1724, and 1726 into corresponding analog signals, and input these analog signals into optional interpolation filters 1731, 1733, 1735, and 1737, respectively. Interpolation filters 1731, 1733, 1735, and 1737, which also serve as anti-aliasing filters, shape the DACs output signals to produce the desired output waveform. Interpolation filters 1731, 1733, 1735, and 1737 generate signals 1740, 1742, 1744, and 1746, respectively.
Still referring to FIG. 17, signals 1740, 1742, 1744, and 1746 are input into vector modulators 1750 and 1752. Vector modulators 1750 and 1752 generate first and second constant envelope constituents. In the embodiment of FIG. 17, channel clock 1714 is set according to a desired output signal frequency to thereby establish the frequency of the output signal 1770.
Referring to FIG. 17, vector modulator 1750 combines signal 1740, multiplied with a 90° shifted version of channel clock signal 1714, and signal 1742, multiplied with a 0° shifted version of channel clock signal 1714, to generate output signal 1754. In parallel, vector modulator 1752 combines signal 1746, multiplied with a 90° shifted version of channel clock signal 1714, and signal 1744, multiplied with a 0° shifted version of channel clock signal 1714, to generate output signal 1756.
Output signals 1754 and 1756 represent constant envelope signals. A sum of output signals 1754 and 1756 results in a carrier signal having the I and Q characteristics of the original baseband signal. In embodiments, to generate a desired power level at the output of vector power amplifier 1700, signals 1754 and 1756 are amplified and then summed. In the embodiment of FIG. 17, for example, signals 1754 and 1756 are, respectively, input into corresponding power amplifiers (PAs) 1760 and 1762. In an embodiment, PAs 1760 and 1762 include switching power amplifiers. Autobias circuitry 1718 controls the bias of PAs 1760 and 1762. In the embodiment of FIG. 17, for example, autobias circuitry 1718 provides a bias voltage 1728 to PAs 1760 and 1762.
In an embodiment, PAs 1760 and 1762 apply equal or substantially equal power amplification to respective constant envelope signals 1754 and 1756. In an embodiment, the power amplification is set according to the desired output power level. In other embodiments of vector power amplifier 1700, PA drivers are additionally employed to provide additional power amplification capability to the amplifier. In the embodiment of FIG. 17, for example, PA drivers 1774 and 1776 are optionally added, respectively, between vector modulators 1750 and 1752 and subsequent PAs 1760 and 1762.
Respective output signals 1764 and 1766 of PAs 1760 and 1762 are substantially constant envelope signals. In the embodiment of FIG. 17, output signals 1764 and 1766 are coupled together to generate output signal 1770 of vector power amplifier 1700. In embodiments, it is noted that the outputs of PAs 1760 and 1762 are directly coupled. Direct coupling in this manner means that there is minimal or no resistive, inductive, or capacitive isolation between the outputs of PAs 1760 and 1762. In other words, outputs of PAs 1760 and 1762 are coupled together without intervening components. Alternatively, in an embodiment, the outputs of PAs 1760 and 1762 are coupled together indirectly through inductances and/or capacitances that result in low or minimal impedance connections, and/or connections that result in minimal isolation and minimal power loss. Alternatively, outputs of PAs 1760 and 1762 are coupled using well known combining techniques, such as Wilkinson, hybrid couplers, transformers, or known active combiners. In an embodiment, the PAs 1760 and 1762 provide integrated amplification and power combining in a single operation. In an embodiment, one or more of the power amplifiers and/or drivers described herein are implemented using multiple input, single output (MISO) power amplification techniques, examples of which are shown in FIGS. 17A, 17B, and 51A-H.
Output signal 1770 represents a signal having the desired I and Q characteristics of the baseband signal and the desired output power level and frequency. In embodiments of vector power amplifier 1700, a pull-up impedance 1778 is coupled between the output of vector power amplifier 1700 and a power supply. In other embodiments, an impedance matching network 1780 is coupled at the output of vector power amplifier 1700. Output stage embodiments according to power amplification methods and systems of the present invention will be further described below in section 3.5.
In other embodiments of vector power amplifier 1700, process detectors are employed to compensate for any process and/or temperature variations in circuitry of the amplifier. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 17, for example, process detector 1772 is optionally added to monitor variations in PA drivers 1774 and 1776.
FIG. 17A is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment 1700A of a vector power amplifier implementing process flowchart 1600. Optional components are illustrated with dashed lines, although other embodiments may have more or less optional components. Embodiment 1700A illustrates a multiple-input single-output (MISO) implementation of the amplifier of FIG. 17. In the embodiment of FIG. 17A, constant envelope signals 1754 and 1756, output from vector modulators 1750 and 1760, are input into MISO PA 1790. MISO PA 1790 is a two-input single-output power amplifier. In an embodiment, MISO PA 1790 include elements 1760, 1762, 1772, 1774, and 1776 as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 17, or functional equivalents thereof. In another embodiment, MISO PA 1790 may include other elements, such as pre-drivers, not shown in the embodiment of FIG. 17. Further, MISO PA 1790 is not limited to being a two-input PA as shown in FIG. 17A. In other embodiments, as will be described further below with reference to FIGS. 51A-H, PA 1790 can have any number of inputs.
In another embodiment of embodiment 1700, shown as embodiment 1700B of FIG. 17B, optional Autobias circuitry 1218 generates separate bias control signals 1715, 1717, and 1719, corresponding to Bias A, Bias B, and Bias C, respectively. Signals 1715, 1717, and 1719 may or may not be generated separately within Autobias circuitry 1718, but are output separately as shown. Further, signals 1715, 1717, and 1719 may or may not be related as determined by the biasing required for the different stages of MISO PA 1790.
FIG. 18 is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment 1800 of a vector power amplifier according to the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA embodiment of FIG. 16. Optional components are illustrated with dashed lines, although other embodiments may have more or less optional components.
In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 18, a DAC 1820 of sufficient resolution and sample rate replaces DACs 1730, 1732, 1734, and 1736 of the embodiment of FIG. 17. DAC 1820 is controlled by a DAC clock 1814.
DAC 1820 receives information signal 1810 from I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1716. Information signal 1810 includes identical information content to signals 1720, 1722, 1724, and 1726 in the embodiment of FIG. 17.
DAC 1820 may output a single analog signal at a time. Accordingly, a sample-and-hold architecture may be used as shown in FIG. 18.
In the embodiment of FIG. 18, DAC 1820 sequentially outputs analog signals 1822, 1824, 1826, and 1828 to sample-and-hold circuits 1832, 1834, 1836, and 1838, respectively. In an embodiment, DAC 1820 is of sufficient resolution and sample rate to replace DACs 1720, 1722, 1724, and 1726 of the embodiment of FIG. 17. An output selector 1812 determines which of output signals 1822, 1824, 1826, and 1828 are selected for output.
DAC 1820's DAC clock signal 1814, output selector signal 1812, and sample-and-hold clocks 1830A-D, and 1840 are controlled by a control module that can be independent or integrated into transfer function module 1716.
In an embodiment, sample-and-hold circuits 1832, 1834, 1836, and 1838 sample and hold their respective values and, according to a clock signal 1830A-D, release the values to a second set of sample-and-hold circuits 1842, 1844, 1846, and 1848. For example, S/H 1832 release's its value to S/H 1842 according to a received clock signal 1830A. In turn, sample-and-hold circuits 1842, 1844, 1846, and 1848 hold the received analog values, and simultaneously release the values to interpolation filters 1852, 1854, 1856, and 1858 according to a common clock signal 1840.
In another embodiment, a single set of S/H circuitry that includes S/H 1832, 1834, 1836, and 1838 can be employed. Accordingly, S/H circuits 1832, 1834, 1836, and 1838 receive analog values from DAC 1820, and each samples and holds its received value according to independent clocks 1830A-D. For example, S/H 1832 is controlled by clock 1830A, which may not be synchronized with clock 1830B that controls S/H 1834. For example, DAC 1820 outputs signals 1822, 1824, 1826, and 1828 with appropriately selected analog values calculated by transfer function module 1716 to S/H circuits 1832, 1834, 1836, and 1838 in order to compensate for the time differences between clocks 1830A-D.
Other aspects of vector power amplifier 1800 correspond substantially to those described above with respect to vector power amplifier 1700.
FIG. 18A is a block diagram that illustrates another exemplary embodiment 1800A of a vector power amplifier according to the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA embodiment. Optional components are illustrated with dashed lines, although in other embodiments more or less components may be optional. Embodiment 1800A is a Multiple Input Single Output (MISO) implementation of embodiment 1800 of FIG. 18.
In the embodiment of FIG. 18A, constant envelope signals 1754 and 1756, output from vector modulators 1750 and 1752, are input into MISO PA 1860. MISO PA 1860 is a two-input single-output power amplifier. In an embodiment, MISO PA 1860 includes elements 1744, 1746, 1760, 1762, and 1772 as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 18, or functional equivalents thereof. In another embodiment, MISO PA 1860 may include other elements, such as pre-drivers, not shown in the embodiment of FIG. 17. Further, MISO PA 1860 is not limited to being a two-input PA as shown in FIG. 18A. In other embodiments as will be described further below with reference to FIGS. 51A-H, PA 1860 can have any number of inputs.
The embodiment of FIG. 18A further illustrates two different sample and hold architectures with a single or two levels of S/H circuitry as shown. The two implementations have been described above with respect to FIG. 18.
Other aspects of vector power amplifier 1800A are substantially equivalent to those described above with respect to vector power amplifiers 1700 and 1800.
3.4) I and Q Data to Vector Modulator Transfer Functions
In some of the above described embodiments, I and Q data transfer functions are provided to transform received I and Q data into amplitude information inputs for subsequent stages of vector modulation and amplification. For example, in the embodiment of FIG. 17, I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1716 processes I and Q information signal 1710 to generate in-phase and quadrature amplitude information signals 1720, 1722, 1724, and 1726 of first and second constant envelope constituents 1754 and 1756 of signal r(t). Subsequently, vector modulators 1750 and 1752 utilize the generated amplitude information signals 1720, 1722, 1724, and 1726 to create the first and second constant envelope constituent signals 1754 and 1756. Other examples include modules 710, 712, and 1216 in FIGS. 7, 8, 12, and 13. These modules implement transfer functions to transform I and/or Q data into amplitude information inputs for subsequent stages of vector modulation and amplification.
According to the present invention, I and Q Data Transfer Function modules may be implemented using digital circuitry, analog circuitry, software, firmware or any combination thereof.
Several factors affect the actual implementation of a transfer function according to the present invention, and vary from embodiment to embodiment. In one aspect, the selected VPA embodiment governs the amplitude information output of the transfer function and associated module. It is apparent, for example, that I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1216 of the CPCP 2-Branch VPA embodiment 1200 differs in output than I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1716 of the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA embodiment 1700.
In another aspect, the complexity of the transfer function varies according to the desired modulation scheme(s) that need to be supported by the VPA implementation. For example, the sample clock, the DAC sample rate, and the DAC resolution are selected in accordance with the appropriate transfer function to construct the desired output waveform(s).
According to the present invention, transfer function embodiments may be designed to support one or more VPA embodiments with the ability to switch between the supported embodiments as desired. Further, transfer function embodiments and associated modules can be designed to accommodate a plurality of modulation schemes. A person skilled in the art will appreciate, for example, that embodiments of the present invention may be designed to support a plurality of modulation schemes (individually or in combination) including, but not limited to, BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, DPSK, CDMA, WCDMA, W-CDMA, GSM, EDGE, MPSK, MQAM, MSK, CPSK, PM, FM, OFDM, and multi-tone signals. In an embodiment, the modulation scheme(s) may be configurable and/or programmable via the transfer function module.
3.4.1) Cartesian 4-Branch VPA Transfer Function
FIG. 19 is a process flowchart 1900 that illustrates an example I and Q transfer function embodiment according to the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA embodiment. The process begins at step 1910, which includes receiving an in-phase data component and a quadrature data component. In the Cartesian 4-Branch VPA embodiment of FIG. 7A, for example, this is illustrated by I Data Transfer Function module 710 receiving I information signal 702, and Q Data Transfer Function module 712 receiving Q information signal 704. It is noted that, in the embodiment of FIG. 7A, I and Q Data Transfer Function modules 710 and 712 are illustrated as separate components. In implementation, however, I and Q Data Transfer Function modules 710 and 712 may be separate or combined into a single module.
Step 1920 includes calculating a phase shift angle between first and second substantially equal and constant envelope constituents of the I component. In parallel, step 1920 also includes calculating a phase shift angle between first and second substantially equal and constant envelope constituents of the Q component. As described above, the first and second constant envelope constituents of the I components are appropriately phased relative to the I component. Similarly, the first and second constant envelope constituents of the Q components are appropriately phased relative to the Q component. In the embodiment of FIG. 7A, for example, step 1920 is performed by I and Q Data Transfer Function modules 710 and 712.
Step 1930 includes calculating in-phase and quadrature amplitude information associated with the first and second constant envelope constituents of the I component. In parallel, step 1930 includes calculating in-phase and quadrature amplitude information associated with the first and second constant envelope constituents of the Q component. In the embodiment of FIG. 7A, for example, step 1930 is performed by and I and Q Data Transfer Function modules 710 and 712.
Step 1940 includes outputting the calculated amplitude information to a subsequent vector modulation stage. In the embodiment of FIG. 7A, for example, I and Q Transfer Function modules 710 and 712 output amplitude information signals 722, 724, 726, and 728 to vector modulators 760, 762, 764, and 766 through DACs 730, 732, 734, and 736.
FIG. 20 is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment 2000 of a transfer function module, such as transfer function modules 710 and 712 of FIG. 7A, implementing the process flowchart 1900. In the example of FIG. 20, transfer function module 2000 receives I and Q data signals 2010 and 2012. In an embodiment, I and Q data signals 2010 and 2012 represent I and Q data components of a baseband signal, such as signals 702 and 704 in FIG. 7A.
Referring to FIG. 20, in an embodiment, transfer function module 2000 samples I and Q data signals 2010 and 2012 according to a sampling clock 2014. Sampled I and Q data signals are received by components 2020 and 2022, respectively, of transfer function module 2000. Components 2020 and 2022 measure, respectively, the magnitudes of the sampled I and Q data signals. In an embodiment, components 2020 and 2022 are magnitude detectors.
Components 2020 and 2022 output the measured I and Q magnitude information to components 2030 and 2032, respectively, of transfer function module 2000. In an embodiment, the measured I and Q magnitude information is in the form of digital signals. Based on the I magnitude information, component 2030 calculates a phase shift angle φI between first and second equal and constant or substantially equal and constant envelope constituents of the sampled I signal. Similarly, based on the Q magnitude information, component 2032 calculates phase shift angle φQ between a first and second equal and constant or substantially equal and constant envelope constituents of the sampled Q signal. This operation shall now be further described.
In the embodiment of FIG. 20, φI and φQ are illustrated as functions ƒ(|{right arrow over (I)}|) and ƒ(|{right arrow over (Q)}|) of the I and Q magnitude signals. In embodiments, functions ƒ(|{right arrow over (I)}|) and ƒ(|{right arrow over (Q)}|) are set according to the relative magnitudes of the baseband I and Q signals respectively. ƒ(|{right arrow over (I)}|) and ƒ(|{right arrow over (Q)}|) according to embodiments of the present invention will be further described below in section 3.4.4.
Referring to FIG. 20, components 2030 and 2032 output the calculated phase shift information to components 2040 and 2042, respectively. Based on phase shift angle φI, component 2040 calculates in-phase and quadrature amplitude information of the first and second constant envelope constituents of the sampled I signal. Similarly, based on phase shift angle φQ, component 2042 calculates in-phase and quadrature amplitude information of the first and second constant envelope constituents of the sampled Q signal. Due to symmetry, in embodiments of the invention, calculation is required for 4 values only. In the example of FIG. 20, the values are illustrated as sgn(I)×IUX, IUY, QUX, and sgn(Q)×QUY, as provided in FIG. 5.
Components 2040 and 2042 output the calculated amplitude information to subsequent stages of the vector power amplifier. In embodiments, each of the four calculated values is output separately to a digital-to-analog converter. As shown in the embodiment of FIG. 7A for example, signals 722, 724, 726, and 728 are output separately to DACs 730, 732, 734, and 736, respectively. In other embodiments, signals 722, 724, 726, and 728 are output into a single DAC as shown in FIGS. 800A and 800B.
3.4.2) CPCP 2-Branch VPA Transfer Function
FIG. 21 is a process flowchart 2100 that illustrates an example I and Q transfer function embodiment according to the CPCP 2-Branch VPA embodiment. The process begins at step 2110, which includes receiving in-phase (I) and quadrature (Q) data components of a baseband signal. In the CPCP 2-Branch VPA embodiment of FIG. 12, for example, this is illustrated by I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1216 receiving I and Q information signal 1210.
Step 2120 includes determining the magnitudes |I| and |Q| of the received I and Q data components.
Step 2130 includes calculating a magnitude |R| of the baseband signal based on the measured |I| and |Q| magnitudes. In an embodiment, |R| is such that |R|2=|I|2+|Q|2. In the embodiment of FIG. 12, for example, steps 2120 and 2130 are performed by I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1216 based on received information signal 1210.
Step 2140 includes normalizing the measured |I| and |Q| magnitudes. In an embodiment, |I| and |Q| are normalized to generate an Iclk_phase and Qclk_phase signals (as shown in FIG. 10) such that |Iclk—phase|2+|Qclk—phase|2=constant. In the embodiment of FIG. 12, for example, step 2140 is performed by I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1216 based on received information signal 1210.
Step 2150 includes calculating in-phase and quadrature amplitude information associated with first and second constant envelope constituents. In the embodiment of FIG. 12, for example, step 2150 is performed by I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1216 based on the envelope magnitude |R|.
Step 2160 includes outputting the generated Iclk_phase and Qclk_phase (from step 2140) and the calculated amplitude information (from step 2150) to appropriate vector modulators. In the embodiment of FIG. 12, for example, I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1216 output information signals 1220, 1222, 1224, and 1226 to vector modulators 1238, 1260, and 1262 through DACs 1230, 1232, 1234, and 1236.
FIG. 22 is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment 2200 of a transfer function module (such as module 1216 of FIG. 12) implementing the process flowchart 2100. In the example of FIG. 22, transfer function module 2200 receives I and Q data signal 2210. In an embodiment, I and Q data signal 2210 includes I and Q components of a baseband signal, such as signal 1210 in the embodiment of FIG. 12, for example.
In an embodiment, transfer function module 2200 samples I and Q data signal 2210 according to a sampling clock 2212. Sampled I and Q data signals are received by component 2220 of transfer function module 2200. Component 2220 measures the magnitudes |{right arrow over (I)}| and |{right arrow over (Q)}| of the sampled I and Q data signals.
Based on the measured |{right arrow over (I)}| and |{right arrow over (Q)}| magnitudes, component 2230 calculates the magnitude |R| of the baseband signal. In an embodiment, |{right arrow over (R)}| is such that |{right arrow over (R)}|2=|{right arrow over (I)}|2+|{right arrow over (Q)}|2.
In parallel, component 2240 normalizes the measured |{right arrow over (I)}| and |{right arrow over (Q)}| magnitudes. In an embodiment, |{right arrow over (I)}| and |{right arrow over (Q)}| are normalized to generate Iclk_phase and Qclk_phase signals such that |Iclk_phase|2+|Qclk_phase|2=constant, where Iclk_phase and |Qclk_phase| represent normalized magnitudes of |{right arrow over (I)}| and |{right arrow over (Q)}|. Typically, given that the constant has a value A, the measured |{right arrow over (I)}| and |{right arrow over (I)}| magnitudes are both divided by the quantity




  A
  
    
      
        
          
          
            I
            →
          
          
        
        2
      
      +
      
        
          
          
            Q
            →
          
          
        
        2
      
    
  




Component 2250 receives the calculated |{right arrow over (R)}| magnitude from component 2230, and based on it calculates a phase shift angle φ between first and second constant envelope constituents. Using the calculated phase shift angle φ, component 2050 then calculates in-phase and quadrature amplitude information associated with the first and second constant envelope constituents.
In the embodiment of FIG. 22, the phase shift angle φ is illustrated as a function ƒ(|{right arrow over (R)}|) of the calculated magnitude |{right arrow over (R)}|.
Referring to FIG. 22, components 2240 and 2250 output the normalized |Iclk_phase| and |Qclk_phase| magnitude information and the calculated amplitude information to DAC's for input into the appropriate vector modulators. In embodiments, the output values are separately output to digital-to-analog converters. As shown in the embodiment of FIG. 12, for example, signals 1220, 1222, 1224, and 1226 are output separately to DACs 1230, 1232, 1234, and 1236, respectively. In other embodiments, signals 1220, 1222, 1224, and 1226 are output into a single DAC as shown in FIGS. 13 and 13A.
3.4.3) Direct Cartesian 2-Branch Transfer Function
FIG. 23 is a process flowchart 2300 that illustrates an example I and Q transfer function embodiment according to the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA embodiment. The process begins at step 2310, which includes receiving in-phase (I) and quadrature (Q) data components of a baseband signal. In the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA embodiment of FIG. 17, for example, this is illustrated by I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1716 receiving I and Q information signal 1710.
Step 2320 includes determining the magnitudes |I| and |Q| of the received I and Q data components.
Step 2330 includes calculating a magnitude |R| of the baseband signal based on the measured |I| and |Q| magnitudes. In an embodiment, |R| is such that |R|2=|I|2+|Q|2. In the embodiment of FIG. 17, for example, steps 2320 and 2330 are performed by I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1716 based on received information signal 1710.
Step 2340 includes calculating a phase shift angle θ of the baseband signal based on the measured |I| and |Q| magnitudes. In an embodiment, θ is such that




  
    θ
    =
    
      
        tan
        
          -
          1
        
      
      ⁡
      
        (
        
          
            
            Q
            
          
          
            
            I
            
          
        
        )
      
    
  
  ,




and wherein the sign of I and Q determine the quadrant of θ. In the embodiment of FIG. 17, for example, step 2340 is performed by I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1216 based on I and Q data components received in information signal 1210.

Step 2350 includes calculating in-phase and quadrature amplitude information associated with a first and second constant envelope constituents of the baseband signal. In the embodiment of FIG. 17, for example, step 2350 is performed by I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1716 based on previously calculated magnitude |R| and phase shift angle θ.
Step 2360 includes outputting the calculated amplitude information to DAC's for input into the appropriate vector modulators. In the embodiment of FIG. 17, for example, I and Q Data Transfer Function module 1716 output information signals 1720, 1722, 1724, and 1726 to vector modulators 1750 and 1752 through DACs 1730, 1732, 1734, and 1736. In other embodiments, signals 1720, 1722, 1724, and 1726 are output into a single DAC as shown in FIGS. 18 and 18A.
FIG. 24 is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary embodiment 2400 of a transfer function module implementing the process flowchart 2300. In the example of FIG. 24, transfer function module 2400 (such as transfer function module 1716) receives I and Q data signal 2410, such as signal 1710 in FIG. 17. In an embodiment, I and Q data signal 2410 includes I and Q data components of a baseband signal.
In an embodiment, transfer function module 2400 samples I and Q data signal 2410 according to a sampling clock 2412. Sampled I and Q data signals are received by component 2420 of transfer function module 2200. Component 2420 measures the magnitudes |{right arrow over (I)}| and |{right arrow over (Q)}| of the sampled I and Q data signals.
Based on the measured |{right arrow over (I)}| and |{right arrow over (Q)}| magnitudes, component 2430 calculates the magnitude |{right arrow over (R)}|. In an embodiment, |{right arrow over (R)}| is such that |{right arrow over (R)}|2=|{right arrow over (I)}|2+|{right arrow over (Q)}|2.
In parallel, component 2240 calculates the phase shift angle θ of the baseband signal. In an embodiment, θ is such that




  
    θ
    =
    
      
        tan
        
          -
          1
        
      
      ⁡
      
        (
        
          
            
            
              Q
              →
            
            
          
          
            
            
              I
              →
            
            
          
        
        )
      
    
  
  ,




where the sign of I and Q determine the quadrant of θ.

Component 2450 receives the calculated |{right arrow over (R)}| magnitude from component 2430, and based on it calculates a phase shift angle φ between first and second constant envelope constituent signals. In the embodiment of FIG. 24, the phase shift angle φ is illustrated as a function ƒ3|{right arrow over (R)}|) of the calculated magnitude |{right arrow over (R)}|. This is further described in section 3.4.4.
In parallel, component 2450 receives the calculated phase shift angle θ from component 2440. As functions of φ and θ, component 2450 then calculates in-phase and quadrature amplitude information for the vector modulator inputs that generate the first and second constant envelope constituents. In an embodiment, the in-phase and quadrature amplitude information supplied to the vector modulators are according to the equations provided in (18).
Component 2450 outputs the calculated amplitude information to subsequent stages of the vector power amplifier. In embodiments, the output values are separately output to digital-to-analog converters. As shown in the embodiment of FIG. 17, for example, signals 1720, 1722, 1724, and 1726 are output separately to DACs 1730, 1732, 1734, and 1736, respectively. In other embodiments, signals 1720, 1722, 1724, and 1726 are output into a single DAC as shown in FIGS. 18 and 18A.
3.4.4) Magnitude to Phase Shift Transform
Embodiments of f(|I|), f(|Q|) of FIG. 20 and f(|R|) of FIGS. 22 and 24 shall now be further described.
According to the present invention, any periodic waveform that can be represented by a Fourier series and a Fourier transform can be decomposed into two or more constant envelope signals.
Below are provided two examples for sinusoidal and square waveforms.
3.4.4.1) Magnitude to Phase Shift Transform for Sinusoidal Signals:
Consider a time-varying complex envelope sinusoidal signal r(t). In the time domain, it can be represented as:

r(t)=R(t)sin(ωt+δ(t))  (20)

where R(t) represents the signal's envelope magnitude at time t, δ(t) represents the signal's phase shift angle at time t, and ω represents the signal's frequency in radians per second.

It can be verified that, at any time instant t, signal r(t) can be obtained by the sum of two appropriately phased equal and constant or substantially equal and constant envelope signals. In other words, it can be shown that:

R(t)sin(ωt+δ(t))=A sin(ωt)+A sin(ωt+φ(t))  (21)

for an appropriately chosen phase shift angle φ(t) between the two constant envelope signals. The phase shift angle φ(t) will be derived as a function of R(t) in the description below. This is equivalent to the magnitude to phase shift transform for sinusoidal signals.

Using a sine trigonometric identity, equation (21) can be re-written as:

R(t)sin(ωt+δ(t))=A sin(ωt)+A sin(ωt)cos φ(t)+A sin(φ(t))cos ωt; 

R(t)sin(ωt+δ(t))=A sin(φ(t))cos ωt+A(1+cos φ(t))sin ωt.  (22)

Note, from equation (22), that signal r(t) is written as a sum of an in-phase component and a quadrature component. Accordingly, the envelope magnitude R(t) can be written as:

R(t)=√{square root over ((A sin(φ(t)))2+(A(1+cos(φ(t))))2)}{square root over ((A sin(φ(t)))2+(A(1+cos(φ(t))))2)};

R(t)=√{square root over (2A(A+cos(φ(t))))}.  (23)

Equation (23) relates the envelope magnitude R(t) of signal r(t) to the phase shift angle φ(t) between two constant envelope constituents of signal r(t). The constant envelope constituents have equal or substantially equal envelope magnitude A, which is typically normalized to 1.
Inversely, from equation (23), the phase shift angle φ(t) can be written as a function of R(t) as follows:




  
    
      
        
          φ
          ⁡
          
            (
            t
            )
          
        
        =
        
          arc
          ⁢
          
            
          
          ⁢
          
            
              cos
              ⁡
              
                (
                
                  
                    
                      
                        R
                        ⁡
                        
                          (
                          t
                          )
                        
                      
                      2
                    
                    
                      2
                      ⁢
                      
                        
                      
                      ⁢
                      
                        A
                        2
                      
                    
                  
                  -
                  1
                
                )
              
            
            .
          
        
      
    
    
      
        (
        24
        )
      
    
  




Equation (24) represents the magnitude to phase shift transform for the case of sinusoidal signals, and is illustrated in FIG. 26.
3.4.4.2) Magnitude to Phase Shift Transform for Square Wave Signals:
FIG. 28 illustrates a combination of two constant envelope square wave signals according to embodiments of the present invention. In FIG. 28, signals 2810 and 2820 are constant envelope signals having a period T, a duty cycle γT (0<γ<1), and envelope magnitudes A1 and A2, respectively.
Signal 2830 results from combining signals 2810 and 2820. According to embodiments of the present invention, signal 2830 will have a magnitude equal or substantially equal to a product of signals 2810 and 2820. In other words, signal 2830 will have a magnitude of zero whenever either of signals 2810 or 2820 has a magnitude of zero, and a non-zero magnitude when both signals 2810 and 2820 have non-zero magnitudes.
Further, signal 2830 represents a pulse-width-modulated signal. In other words, the envelope magnitude of signal 2830 is determined according to the pulse width of signal 2830 over one period of the signal. More specifically, the envelope magnitude of signal 2830 is equal or substantially to the area under the curve of signal 2830.
Referring to FIG. 28, signals 2810 and 2820 are shown time-shifted relative to each other by a time shift t′. Equivalently, signals 2810 and 2820 are phase-shifted relative to each other by a phase shift angle




  φ
  =
  
    
      (
      
        
          t
          ′
        
        T
      
      )
    
    ×
    2
    ⁢
    
      
    
    ⁢
    π
  




radians.

Still referring to FIG. 28, note that the envelope magnitude R of signal 2830, in FIG. 28, is given by:

R=A1×A2×(γT−t′)  (25)

Accordingly, it can be deduced that φ is related to R according to:




  
    
      
        φ
        =
        
          
            [
            
              γ
              -
              
                R
                
                  T
                  ⁡
                  
                    (
                    
                      
                        A
                        1
                      
                      ⁢
                      
                        A
                        2
                      
                    
                    )
                  
                
              
            
            ]
          
          ×
          
            
              (
              
                2
                ⁢
                
                  
                
                ⁢
                π
              
              )
            
            .
          
        
      
    
    
      
        (
        26
        )
      
    
  




Note, from equation (26), that R is at a maximum of γA1A2 when φ=0. In other words, the envelope magnitude is at a maximum when the two constant envelope signals are in-phase with each other.
In typical implementations, signals 2810 and 2820 are normalized and have equal or substantially equal envelope magnitude of 1. Further, signals 2810 and 2820 typically have a duty cycle of 0.5. Accordingly, equation (26) reduces to:




  
    
      
        φ
        =
        
          
            [
            
              0.5
              -
              
                R
                T
              
            
            ]
          
          ×
          
            
              (
              
                2
                ⁢
                
                  
                
                ⁢
                π
              
              )
            
            .
          
        
      
    
    
      
        (
        27
        )
      
    
  




Equation (27) illustrates the magnitude to phase shift transform for the case of normalized and equal or substantially equal envelope magnitude square wave signals. Equation (27) is illustrated in FIG. 26.
3.4.5) Waveform Distortion Compensation
In certain embodiments, magnitude to phase shift transforms may not be implemented exactly as theoretically or practically desired. In fact, several factors may exist that require adjustment or tuning of the derived magnitude to phase shift transform for optimal (or at least improved) operation. In practice, phase and amplitude errors may exist in the vector modulation circuitry, gain and phase imbalances can occur in the vector power amplifier branches, and distortion may exist in the MISO amplifier itself including but not limited to errors introduced by directly combining at a single circuit node transistor outputs within the MISO amplifier described herein. Each of these factors either singularly or in combination will contribute to output waveform distortions that result in deviations from the desired output signal r(t). When output waveform distortion exceeds system design requirements, waveform distortion compensation may be required.
FIG. 25 illustrates the effect of waveform distortion on a signal using phasor signal representation. In FIG. 25, {right arrow over (R)} represents a phasor representation of a desired signal r(t). In the example of FIG. 25, waveform distortion can cause the actual output phasor to vary from r(t) anywhere within the phasor error region. An exemplary phasor error region is illustrated in FIG. 25, and is equal or substantially equal to the maximum error vector magnitude. Phasors {right arrow over (R1)} and {right arrow over (R2)} represent examples of potential output phasors that deviate from the desired r(t).
According to embodiments of the present invention, waveform distortions can be measured, calculated, or estimated during the manufacture of the system and/or in real time or non-real time operation. FIG. 54A and FIG. 55 are examples of methods that can be used for phasor error measurement and correction. These waveform distortions can be compensated for or reduced at various points in the system. For example, a phase error between the branch amplifiers can be adjusted by applying an analog voltage offset to the vector modulation circuitry, within the transfer function, and/or using real time or non-real time feedback techniques as shown in the example system illustrated in FIGS. 58, 59 and 60. Similarly, branch amplification imbalances can be adjusted by applying an analog voltage offset to the vector modulation circuitry, within the transfer function, and/or using real time or non-real time feedback techniques as shown in FIGS. 58, 59 and 60. In the system illustrated in FIGS. 58, 59 and 60, for example, waveform distortion adjustment is performed, as illustrated in FIG. 60, using Differential Branch Amplitude Measurement Circuitry 6024 and Differential Branch Phase Measurement Circuitry 6026, which provide a Differential Branch Amplitude signal 5950 and a Differential Branch Phase signal 5948, respectively. These signals are input into an A/D Converter 5732 by input signal selector 5946, with the values generated by A/D converter 5732 being input into Digital Control Module 5602. Digital Control Module 5602 uses the values generated by A/D converter 5732 to calculate adjusted or offset values to provide control voltages for phase adjustments to Vector modulation circuitry 5922, 5924, 5926, and 5928 and control voltages for amplitude adjustments to Gain Balance control circuitry 6016. In FIG. 58, these control voltages are illustrated using Gain Balance Control signal 5749 and Phase Balance Control signal 5751. The feedback approach described above also compensates for process variations, temperature variations, IC package variations, and circuit board variations by ensuring the system amplitude and phase errors remain with a specified tolerance. Additional example feedback and feedforward error measurement and compensation techniques are further described in section 4.1.2.
In other embodiments, the measured, calculated, or estimated waveform distortions are compensated for at the transfer function stage of the power amplifier. In this approach, the transfer function is designed to factor in and correct the measured, calculated, and/or estimated waveform distortions. FIG. 78 illustrates a mathematical derivation of the magnitude to phase shift transform in the presence of amplitude and phase errors in branches of the VPA. Equation (28) in FIG. 78 takes into account both phase and amplitude errors in an exemplary embodiment. Note that R*sin({acute over (ω)}*t+δ) in FIG. 78 can be representative of either {right arrow over (R1)} or {right arrow over (R2)} in FIG. 25, for example. Equation (28) assumes that amplitudes A1 and A2 of the VPA branches can be different and that each branch can contain a respective phase error φe1(t) and φe2(t). For reference purposes, in a theoretically perfect system, A1=A2 and φe1(t)=φe2(t)=0. δ(t) is adjusted by quadrant based on the sign value of the input vectors I(t) and Q(t). As such, with no amplitude or phase errors, the phasor corresponding to R*sin({acute over (ω)}*t+δ) is aligned with the desired phasor {right arrow over (R)} in FIG. 25.
In some embodiments, in practice, amplitude and phase components of the phasor corresponding to R*sin({acute over (ω)}*t+δ) are compared to the desired phasor {right arrow over (R)} to generate system amplitude and phase error deviations. These amplitude and phase error deviations from the desired phasor {right arrow over (R)}, as shown in FIG. 25, can be accounted for in the system transfer function. In an embodiment, A1 and A2 can be substantially equalized and φe1(t) and φe2(t) can be minimized by properly adjusting the control inputs to the vector modulation circuitry. In an embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 57, this is performed by the digital control module, which provides, using digital-to-analog converters DAC_01, DAC_02, DAC_03, and DAC_04, control inputs to the vector modulation circuitry.
Accordingly, given the fact that equations such as equation (28) can be used to calculate the resultant phasor at any instant in time based on the values of A1 and A2 and φe1(t) and φe2(t), transfer function modification(s) can be made to compensate for the system errors, and such transfer function modification(s) will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the teachings contained herein. Exemplary methods for generating error tables and/or mathematical functions to compensate for system errors are described in Section 4.1.2. It will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art(s) that these waveform distortion correction and compensation techniques can be implemented in either the digital or the analog domains, and implementation of such techniques will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the teachings contained herein.
3.5) Output Stage
An aspect of embodiments of the present invention lies in summing constituent signals at the output stage of a vector power amplifier (VPA). This is shown, for example, in FIG. 7 where the outputs of PAs 770, 772, 774, and 776 are summed. This is similarly shown in FIGS. 8, 12, 13, 17, and 18, for example. Various embodiments for combining the outputs of VPAs are described herein. While the following is described in the context of VPAs, it should be understood that the following teachings generally apply to coupling or summing the outputs of any active devices in any application.
FIG. 29 illustrates a vector power amplifier output stage embodiment 2900 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Output stage 2900 includes a plurality of vector modulator signals 2910-{1, . . . , n} being input into a plurality of corresponding power amplifiers (PAs) 2920-{1, . . . , n}. As described above, signals 2910-{1, . . . , n} represent constituent signals of a desired output signal of the vector power amplifier.
In the example of FIG. 29, PAs 2910-{1, . . . , n} equally amplify or substantially equally amplify input signals 2910-{1, . . . , n} to generate amplified output signals 2930-{1, . . . , n}. Amplified output signals 2930-{1, . . . , n} are coupled together directly at summing node 2940. According to this example embodiment of the present invention, summing node 2940 includes no coupling or isolating element, such as a power combiner, for example. In the embodiment of FIG. 29, summing node 2940 is a zero-impedance (or near-zero impedance) conducting wire. Accordingly, unlike in conventional systems that employ combining elements, the combining of output signals according to this embodiment of the present invention incurs minimal power loss.
In another aspect, output stage embodiments of the present invention can be implemented using multiple-input single-output (MISO) power amplifiers.
In another aspect, output stage embodiments of the present invention can be controlled to increase the power efficiency of the amplifier by controlling the output stage current according to the desired output power level.
In what follows, various output stage embodiments according to VPA embodiments of the present invention are provided in section 3.5.1. In section 3.5.2, embodiments of output stage current shaping functions, for increasing the power efficiency of certain VPA embodiments of the present invention, are presented. Section 3.5.3 describes embodiments of output stage protection techniques that may be utilized for certain output stage embodiments of the present invention.
3.5.1) Output Stage Embodiments
FIG. 30 is a block diagram that illustrates a power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment 3000 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Output stage embodiment 3000 includes a plurality of PA branches 3005-{1, . . . , n}. Signals 3010-{1, . . . , n} incoming from respective vector modulators represent inputs for output stage 3000. According to this embodiment of the present invention, signals 3010-{1, . . . , n} represent equal and constant or substantially equal and constant envelope constituent signals of a desired output signal of the power amplifier.
PA branches 3005-{1, . . . , n} apply equal or substantially equal power amplification to respective signals 3010-{1, . . . , n}. In an embodiment, the power amplification level through PA branches 3005-{1, . . . , n} is set according to a power level requirement of the desired output signal.
In the embodiment of FIG. 30, PA branches 3005-{1, . . . , n} each includes a power amplifier 3040-{1, . . . , n}. In other embodiments, drivers 3030-{1, . . . , n} and pre-drivers 3020-{1, . . . , n}, as illustrated in FIG. 30, may also be added in a PA branch prior to the power amplifier element. In embodiments, drivers and pre-drivers are employed whenever a required output power level may not be achieved in a single amplifying stage.
To generate the desired output signal, outputs of PA branches 3005-{1, . . . , n} are coupled directly at summing node 3050. Summing node 3050 provides little or no isolation between the coupled outputs. Further, summing node 3050 represents a relatively lossless summing node. Accordingly, minimal power loss is incurred in summing the outputs of PAs 3040-{1, . . . , n}. 
Output signal 3060 represents the desired output signal of output stage 3000. In the embodiment of FIG. 30, output signal 3060 is measured across a load impedance 3070.
FIG. 31 is a block diagram that illustrates another power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment 3100 according to the present invention. Similar to the embodiment of FIG. 30, output stage 3100 includes a plurality of PA branches 3105-{1, . . . , n}. Each of PA branches 3105-{1, . . . , n} may include multiple power amplification stages represented by a pre-driver 3020-{1, . . . , n}, driver 3030-{1, . . . , n}, and power amplifier 3040-{1, . . . , n}. Output stage embodiment 3100 further includes pull-up impedances coupled at the output of each power amplification stage to provide biasing of that stage. For example, pull-up impedances 3125-{1, . . . , n} and 3135-{1, . . . , n}, respectively, couple the pre-driver and driver stage outputs to power supply or independent bias power supplies. Similarly, pull-up impedance 3145 couples the PA stage outputs to the power supply or an independent bias power supply. According to this embodiment of the present invention, pull-up impedances represent optional components that may affect the efficiency but not necessarily the operation of the output stage embodiment.
FIG. 32 is a block diagram that illustrates another power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment 3200 according to the present invention. Similar to the embodiment of FIG. 30, output stage 3200 includes a plurality of PA branches 3205-{1, . . . , n}. Each of PA branches 3205-{1, . . . , n} may include multiple power amplification stages represented by a pre-driver 3020-{1, . . . , n}, driver 3030-{1, . . . , n}, and power amplifier 3040-{1, . . . , n}. Output stage embodiment 3200 also includes pull-up impedances coupled at the output of each power amplification stage to achieve a proper biasing of that stage. Further, output stage embodiment 3200 includes matching impedances coupled at the outputs of each power amplification stage to maximize power transfer from that stage. For example, matching impedances 3210-{1, . . . , n} and 3220-{1, . . . , n}, are respectively coupled to the pre-driver and driver stage outputs. Similarly, matching impedance 3240 is coupled at the PA stage output. Note that matching impedance 3240 is coupled to the PA output stage subsequent to summing node 3250.
In the above-described embodiments of FIGS. 30-32, the PA stage outputs are combined by direct coupling at a summing node. For example, in the embodiment of FIG. 30, outputs of PA branches 3005-{1, . . . , n} are coupled together at summing node 3050. Summing node 3050 is a near zero-impedance conducting wire that provides minimal isolation between the coupled outputs. Similar output stage coupling is shown in FIGS. 31 and 32. It is noted that in certain embodiments of the present invention, output coupling, as shown in the embodiments of FIGS. 30-32 or embodiments subsequently described below, may utilize certain output stage protection measures. These protection measures may be implemented at different stages of the PA branch. Further, the type of protection measures needed may be PA implementation-specific. A further discussion of output stage protection according to an embodiment of the present invention is provided in section 3.5.3.
FIG. 33 is a block diagram that illustrates another power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment 3300 according to the present invention. Similar to the embodiment of FIG. 30, output stage 3300 includes a plurality of PA branches 3305-{1, . . . , n}. Each of PA branches 3305-{1, . . . , n} may include multiple power amplification stages represented by a pre-driver 3020-{1, . . . , n}, driver 3030-{1, . . . , n}, and power amplifier 3040-{1, . . . , n}. Output stage embodiment 3300 may also include pull-up impedances 3125-{1, . . . , n}, 3135-{1, . . . , n}, and 3145 coupled at the output of each power amplification stage to achieve a proper biasing of that stage. Additionally, output stage embodiment 3300 may include matching impedances 3210-{1, . . . , n}, 3220-{1, . . . , n}, and 3240 coupled at the output of each power amplification stage to maximize power transfer from that stage. Further, output stage embodiment 3300 receives an autobias signal 3310, from an Autobias module 3340, coupled at the PA stage input of each PA branch 3305-{1, . . . , n}. Autobias module 3340 controls the bias of PAs 3040-{1, . . . , n}. In an embodiment, autobias signal 3340 controls the amount of current flow through the PA stage according to a desired output power level and signal envelope of the output waveform. A further description of the operation of autobias signal and the autobias module is provided below in section 3.5.2.
FIG. 34 is a block diagram that illustrates another power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment 3400 according to the present invention. Similar to the embodiment of FIG. 30, output stage 3400 includes a plurality of PA branches 3405-{1, . . . , n}. Each of PA branches 3405-{1, . . . , n} may include multiple power amplification stages represented by a pre-driver 3020-{1, . . . , n}, driver 3030-{1, . . . , n}, and power amplifier 3040-{1, . . . , n}. Output stage embodiment 3400 may also include pull-impedances 3125-{1, . . . , n}, 3135-{1, . . . , n}, and 3145 coupled at the output of each power amplification stage to achieve desired biasing of that stage. Additionally, output stage embodiment 3400 may include matching impedances 3210-{1, . . . , n}, 3220-{1, . . . , n}, and 3240 coupled at the output of each power amplification stage to maximize power transfer from that stage. Further, output stage embodiment 3400 includes a plurality of harmonic control circuit networks 3410-{1, . . . , n} coupled at the PA stage input of each PA branch {1, . . . , n}. Harmonic control circuit networks 3410-{1, . . . , n} may include a plurality of resistance, capacitance, and/or inductive elements and/or active devices coupled in series or in parallel. According to an embodiment of the present invention, harmonic control circuit networks 3410-{1, . . . , n} provide harmonic control functions for controlling the output frequency spectrum of the power amplifier. In an embodiment, harmonic control circuit networks 3410-{1, . . . , n} are selected such that energy transfer to the fundamental harmonic in the summed output spectrum is increased while the harmonic content of the output waveform is decreased. A further description of harmonic control according to embodiments of the present invention is provided below in section 3.6.
FIG. 35 is a block diagram that illustrates another power amplifier (PA) output stage embodiment 3500 according to the present invention. Output stage embodiment 3500 represents a differential output equivalent of output stage embodiment 3200 of FIG. 32. In embodiment 3500, PA stage outputs 3510-{1, . . . , n} are combined successively to result in two aggregate signals. The two aggregate signals are then combined across a loading impedance, thereby having the output of the power amplifier represent the difference between the two aggregate signals. Referring to FIG. 35, aggregate signals 3510 and 3520 are coupled across loading impedance 3530. The output of the power amplifier is measured across the loading impedance 3530 as the voltage difference between nodes 3540 and 3550. According to embodiment 3500, the maximum output of the power amplifier is obtained when the two aggregate signals are 180 degrees out-of-phase relative to each other. Inversely, the minimum output power results when the two aggregate signals are in-phase relative to each other.
FIG. 36 is a block diagram that illustrates another output stage embodiment 3600 according to the present invention. Similar to the embodiment of FIG. 30, output stage 3600 includes a plurality of PA branches 3605-{1, . . . , n}. Each of PA branches {1, . . . , n} may include multiple power amplification stages represented by a pre-driver 3020-{1, . . . , n}, a driver 3030-{1, . . . , n}, and a power amplifier (PA) 3620-{1, . . . , n}. 
According to embodiment 3600, PA's 3620-{1, . . . , n} include switching power amplifiers. In the example of FIG. 36, power amplifiers 3620-{1, . . . , n} include npn bipolar junction transistor (BJT) elements Q1, . . . , Qn. BJT elements Q1, . . . , Qn have common collector nodes. Referring to FIG. 36, collector terminals of BJT elements Q1, . . . , Qn are coupled together to provide summing node 3640. Emitter terminals of BJT elements Q1, . . . , Qn are coupled to a ground node, while base terminals of BJT elements Q1, . . . , Qn provide input terminals into the PA stage.
FIG. 37 is an example (related to FIG. 36) that illustrates an output signal of the PA stage of embodiment 3600 in response to square wave input signals. For ease of illustration, a two-branch PA stage is considered. In the example of FIG. 37, square wave signals 3730 and 3740 are input, respectively, into BJT elements 3710 and 3720. Note than when either of BJT elements 3710 or 3720 turns on, summing node 3750 is shorted to ground. Accordingly, when either of input signals 3730 or 3740 is high, output signal 3780 will be zero. Further, output signal 3780 will be high only when both input signals 3730 and 3740 are zero. According to this arrangement, PA stage 3700 performs pulse-width modulation, whereby the magnitude of the output signal is a function of the phase shift angle between the input signals.
Embodiments are not limited to npn BJT implementations as described herein. A person skilled in the art will appreciate, for example, that embodiments of the present invention may be implemented using pnp BJTs, CMOS, NMOS, PMOS, or other type of transistors. Further, embodiments can be implemented using GaAs and/or SiGe transistors with the desired transistor switching speed being a factor to consider.
Referring back to FIG. 36, it is noted that while PAs 3620-{1, . . . , n) are each illustrated using a single BJT notation, each PA 3620-{1, . . . , n} may include a plurality of series-coupled transistors. In embodiments, the number of transistors included within each PA is set according to a required maximum output power level of the power amplifier. In other embodiments, the number of transistors in the PA is such that the numbers of transistors in the pre-driver, driver, and PA stages conform to a geometric progression.
FIG. 38 illustrates an exemplary PA embodiment 3800 according to an embodiment of the present invention. PA embodiment 3800 includes a BJT element 3870, a LC network 3860, and a bias impedance 3850. BJT element 3870 includes a plurality of BJT transistors Q1, . . . , Q8 coupled in series. As illustrated in FIG. 38, BJT transistors Q1, . . . , Q8 are coupled together at their base, collector, and emitter terminals. Collector terminal 3880 of BJT element 3870 provides an output terminal for PA 3800. Emitter terminal 3890 of BJT element 3870 may be coupled to substrate or to an emitter terminal of a preceding amplifier stage. For example, emitter terminal 3890 is coupled to an emitter terminal of a preceding driver stage.
Referring to FIG. 38, LC network 3860 is coupled between PA input terminal 3810 and input terminal 3820 of BJT element 3870. LC network 3860 includes a plurality of capacitive and inductive elements. Optionally, a Harmonic Control Circuit network 3830 is also coupled at input terminal 3820 of BJT element 3870. As described above, the HCC network 3830 provides a harmonic control function for controlling the output frequency spectrum of the power amplifier.
Still referring to FIG. 38, bias impedance 3850 couples Iref signal 3840 to input terminal 3820 of BJT element 3870. Iref signal 3840 represents an autobias signal that controls the bias of BJT element 3870 according to a desired output power level and signal envelope characteristics.
It is noted that, in the embodiment of FIG. 38, BJT element 3870 is illustrated to include 8 transistors. It can be appreciated by a person skilled in the art, however, that BJT element 3870 may include any number of transistors as required to achieve the desired output power level of the power amplifier.
In another aspect, output stage embodiments can be implemented using multiple-input single-output (MISO) power amplifiers. FIG. 51A is a block diagram that illustrates an exemplary MISO output stage embodiment 5100A. Output stage embodiment 5100A includes a plurality of vector modulator signals 5110-{1, . . . , n} that are input into MISO power amplifier (PA) 5120. As described above, signals 5110-{1, . . . , n} represent constant envelope constituents of output signal 5130 of the power amplifier. MISO PA 5120 is a multiple input single output power amplifier. MISO PA 5120 receives and amplifies signals 5110-{1, . . . , n} providing a distributed multi signal amplification process to generate output signal 5130.
It is noted that MISO implementations, similar to the one shown in FIG. 51A, can be similarly extended to any of the output stage embodiments described above. More specifically, any of the output stage embodiments of FIGS. 29-37 can be implemented using a MISO approach. Additional MISO embodiments will now be provided with reference to FIGS. 51B-I. It is noted that any of the embodiments described above can be implemented using any of the MISO embodiments that will now be provided.
Referring to FIG. 51A, MISO PA 5120 can have any number of inputs as required by the substantially constant envelope decomposition of the complex envelope input signal. For example, in a two-dimensional decomposition, a two-input power amplifier can be used. According to embodiments of the present invention, building blocks for creating MISO PAs for any number of inputs are provided. FIG. 51B illustrates several MISO building blocks according to an embodiment of the present invention. MISO PA 5110B represents a two-input single-output PA block. In an embodiment, MISO PA 5110B includes two PA branches. The PA branches of MISO PA 5110B may be equivalent to any PA branches described above with reference to FIGS. 29-37, for example. MISO PA 5120B represents a three-input single-output PA block. In an embodiment, MISO PA 5120B includes three PA branches. The PA branches of MISO PA 5120B may equivalent to any PA branches described above with reference to FIGS. 29-37, for example.
Still referring to FIG. 51B, MISO PAs 5110B and 5120B represent basic building blocks for any multiple-input single-output power amplifier according to embodiments of the present invention. For example, MISO PA 5130B is a four-input single-output PA, which can be created by coupling together the outputs of two two-input single-output PA blocks, such as MISO PA 5110B, for example. This is illustrated in FIG. 51C. Similarly, it can be verified that MISO PA 5140B, an n-input single-output PA, can be created from the basic building blocks 5110B and 5120B.
FIG. 51D illustrates various embodiments of the two-input single output PA building block according to embodiments of the present invention.
Embodiment 5110D represents an npn implementation of the two-input single output PA building block. Embodiment 5110D includes two npn transistors coupled together using a common collector node, which provides the output of the PA. A pull-up impedance (not shown) can be coupled between the common collector node and a supply node (not shown).
Embodiment 5130D represents a pnp equivalent of embodiment 5110D. Embodiment 5130D includes two pnp transistors coupled at a common collector node, which provides the output of the PA. A pull-down impedance (not shown) can be coupled between the common collector node and a ground node (not shown).
Embodiment 5140D represents a complementary npn/pnp implementation of the two-input single output PA building block. Embodiment 5140D includes an npn transistor and a pnp transistor coupled at a common collector node, which provides the output of the PA.
Still referring to FIG. 51D, embodiment 5120D represents a NMOS implementation of the two-input single output PA building block. Embodiment 5120D includes two NMOS transistors coupled at a common drain node, which provides the output of the PA.
Embodiment 5160D represents an PMOS equivalent of embodiment 5120D. Embodiment 5120D includes two PMOS transistors coupled at a common drain node, which provides the output of the PA.
Embodiment 5150D represents a complementary MOS implementation of the two-input single-output PA building block. Embodiment 5150D includes a PMOS transistor and an NMOS transistor coupled at common drain node, which provides the output of the PA.
Two-input single-output embodiments of FIG. 51D can be further extended to create multiple-input single-output PA embodiments. FIG. 51E illustrates various embodiments of multiple-input single-output PAs according to embodiments of the present invention.
Embodiment 5150E represents an npn implementation of a multiple-input single-output PA. Embodiment 5150E includes a plurality of npn transistors coupled together using a common collector node, which provides the output of the PA. A pull-up impedance (not shown) can be coupled between the common collector node and a supply voltage (not shown). Note that an n-input single-output PA according to embodiment 5150E can be obtained by coupling additional npn transistors to the two-input single-output PA building block embodiment 5110D.
Embodiment 5170E represents a pnp equivalent of embodiment 5150E. Embodiment 5170E includes a plurality of pnp transistors coupled together using a common collector node, which provides the output of the PA. A pull-down impedance (not shown) may be coupled between the common collector node and a ground node (not shown). Note than an n-input single-output PA according to embodiment 5170E can be obtained by coupling additional pnp transistors to the two-input single-output PA building block embodiment 5130D.
Embodiments 5110E and 5130E represent complementary npn/pnp implementations of a multiple-input single-output PA. Embodiments 5110E and 5130E may include a plurality of npn and/or pnp transistors coupled together using a common collector node, which provides the output of the PA. Note that an n-input single-output PA according to embodiment 5110E can be obtained by coupling additional npn and/or pnp transistors to the two-input single-output PA building block embodiment 5140D. Similarly, an n-input single-output PA according to embodiment 5130E can be obtained by coupling additional npn and/or pnp transistors to the two-input single-output PA building block embodiment 5130D.
Embodiment 5180E represents an PMOS implementation of a multiple-input single-output PA. Embodiment 5180E includes a plurality of PMOS transistors coupled together using a common drain node, which provides the output of the PA. Note that an n-input single-output PA according to embodiment 5180E can be obtained by coupling additional NMOS transistors to the two-input single-output PA building block embodiment 5160D.
Embodiment 5160E represents a NMOS implementation of multiple-input single-output PA. Embodiment 5160E includes a plurality of NMOS transistors coupled together using a common drain node, which provides the output of the PA. Note that an n-input single-output PA according to embodiment 5160E can be obtained by coupling additional PMOS transistors to the two-input single-output PA building block embodiment 5120D.
Embodiments 5120E and 5140E complementary MOS implementations of a multiple-input single-output PA. Embodiments 5120E and 5140E include a plurality of npn and pnp transistors coupled together using a common drain node, which provides the output of the PA. Note that a n-input single-output PA according to embodiment 5120E can be obtained by coupling additional NMOS and/or PMOS transistors to the two-input single-output PA building block 5150D. Similarly, an n-input single-output PA according to embodiment 5140E can be obtained by coupling additional NMOS and/or PMOS transistors to the two-input single-output PA building block 5160D.
FIG. 51F illustrates further multiple-input single-output PA embodiments according to embodiments of the present invention. Embodiment 5110F represents a complementary npn/pnp implementation of a multiple-input single-output PA. Embodiment 5110F can be obtained by iteratively coupling together embodiments of PA building block 5140D. Similarly, embodiment 5120F represents an equivalent NMOS/PMOS complementary implementation of a multiple-input single-output PA. Embodiment 5120F can be obtained by iteratively coupling together embodiments of PA building block 5150D.
It must be noted that the multiple-input single-output embodiments described above may each correspond to a single or multiple branches of a PA. For example, referring to FIG. 29, any of the multiple-input single-output embodiments may be used to replace a single or multiple PAs 2920-{1, . . . , n}. In other words, each of PAs 2920-{1, . . . , n} may be implemented using any of the multiple-input single-output PA embodiments described above or with a single-input single-output PA as shown in FIG. 29.
It is further noted that the transistors shown in the embodiments of FIGS. 51D, 51E, and 51F may each be implemented using a series of transistors as shown in the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 38, for example.
FIG. 51G illustrates further embodiments of the multiple-input single-output PA building blocks. Embodiment 5110G illustrates an embodiment of the two-input single-output PA building block. Embodiment 5110G includes two PA branches that can each be implemented according to single-input single-output or multiple-input single-output PA embodiments as described above. Further, embodiment 5110G illustrates an optional bias control signal 5112G that is coupled to the two branches of the PA embodiment. Bias control signal 5112G is optionally employed in embodiment 5110G based on the specific implementation of the PA branches. In certain implementations, bias control will be required for proper operation of the PA. In other implementations, bias control is not required for proper operation of the PA, but may provide improved PA power efficiency, output circuit protection, or power on current protection.
Still referring to FIG. 51G, embodiment 5120G illustrates an embodiment of the three-input single-output PA building block. Embodiment 5120G includes three PA branches that can each be implemented according to single-input single-output or multiple-input single-output PA embodiments as described above. Further, embodiment 5120G illustrates an optional bias control signal 5114G that is coupled to the branches of the PA embodiment. Bias control signal 5114G is optionally employed in embodiment 5120G based on the specific implementation of the PA branches. In certain implementations, bias control will be required for proper operation of the PA. In other implementations, bias control is not required for proper operation of the PA, but may provide improved PA power efficiency.
FIG. 51H illustrates a further exemplary embodiment 5100H of the two-input single-output PA building block. Embodiment 5100H includes two PA branches that can each be implemented according to single-input single-output or multiple-input single-output PA embodiments as described above. Embodiment 5100H further includes optional elements, illustrated using dashed lines in FIG. 51H, that can be additionally employed in embodiments of embodiment 5100H. In an embodiment, PA building block 5100H may include a driver stage and/or pre-driver stage in each of the PA branches as shown in FIG. 51H. Process detectors may also be optionally employed to detect process and temperature variations in the driver and/or pre-driver stages of the PA. Further, optional bias control may be provided to each of the pre-driver, driver, and/or PA stages of each branch of the PA embodiment. Bias control may be provided to one or more the stages based on the specific implementation of that stage. Further, bias control may be required for certain implementations, while it can be optionally employed in others.
FIG. 51I illustrates a further exemplary embodiment 5100I of a multiple-input single-output PA. Embodiment 5100I includes at least two PA branches that can each be implemented according to single-input single-output or multiple-input single-output PA embodiments as described above. Embodiment 5100I further includes optional elements that can be additionally employed in embodiments of embodiment 5100I. In an embodiment, the PA may include driver and/or pre-driver stages in each of the PA branches as shown in FIG. 51I. Process detectors may also be optionally employed to detect process and temperature variations in the driver and/or pre-driver stages of the PA. Further, optional bias control may be provided to each of the pre-driver, driver, and/or PA stages of each branch of the PA embodiment. Bias control may be provided to one or more the stages based on the specific implementation of that stage. Further, bias control may be required for certain implementations, while it can be optionally employed in others.
3.5.2) Output Stage Current Control—Autobias Module
Embodiments of the output stage and optional pre-driver and driver stage bias and current control techniques according to embodiments of the present invention are described below. In certain embodiments, output stage current control functions are employed to increase the output stage efficiency of a vector power amplifier (VPA) embodiment In other embodiments, output stage current control is used to provide output stage protection from excessive voltages and currents which is further describe in section 3.5.3. In embodiments, output stage current control functions are performed using the Autobias module described above with reference to FIG. 33. A description of the operation of the Autobias module in performing these current control functions is also presented below according to an embodiment of the present invention.
According to embodiments of the present invention, power efficiency of the output stage of a VPA can be increased by controlling the output stage current of the VPA as a function of the output power and the envelope of the output waveform.
FIG. 37, illustrates a partial schematic of a Multiple Input Single Output amplifier comprised of two NPN transistors with input signals S1 and S2. When S1 and S2 are designed to be substantially similar waveforms and substantially constant envelope signals, any time varying complex-envelope output signal can be created at circuit node 3750 by changing the phase relationship of S1 and S2.
FIG. 39 illustrates an example time varying complex-envelope output signal 3910 and its corresponding envelope signal 3920. Note than signal 3910 undergoes a reversal of phase at an instant of time t0. Correspondingly, envelope signal 3920 undergoes a zero crossing at time t0. Output signal 3910 exemplifies output signals according to typical wireless signaling schemes such as W-CDMA, QPSK, and OFDM, for example.
FIG. 40 illustrates example diagram FIG. 37's output stage current in response to output signal 3910. Iout signal 4010 represents output stage current without autobias control, and Iout signal 4020 represents output stage current with autobias control. Without autobias control, as the phase shift between S1 and S2 changes from 0 to 180 degrees, the output current Iout increases. With autobias control, the output current Iout decreases and can be minimized when at or near t0 of FIG. 39.
Note that Iout signal 4020 varies as a function of envelope signal 3920. Accordingly, Iout signal 4020 is at the maximum when a maximum output power is required, but decreases as the required output power goes down. Particularly, Iout signal 4020 approaches zero as the associated output power goes to zero. Accordingly, a person skilled in the art will appreciate that output stage current control, according to embodiments of the present invention, results in significant power savings and increases the power efficiency of the power amplifier.
According to embodiments of the present invention, output stage current control may be implemented according to a variety of functions. In an embodiment, the output stage current can be shaped to correspond to the desired output power of the amplifier. In such an embodiment, the output stage current is a function that is derived from the envelope of the desired output signal, and the power efficiency will increase.
FIG. 41 illustrates exemplary autobias output stage current control functions 4110 and 4120 according to embodiments of the present invention. Function 4110 may represent a function of output power and signal envelope as described above. On the other hand, function 4120 may represent a simple shaping function that goes to a minimum value for a pre-determined amount of time when the output power is below a threshold value. Accordingly, functions 4110 and 4120 represent two cases of autobias output stage current control functions with autobias control signal 4110 resulting in Iout response 4130 and autobias control signal 4120 resulting in Iout response 4140. The invention, however, is not limited to those two exemplary embodiments. According to embodiments of the present invention, output stage autobias current control functions may be designed and implemented to accommodate the efficiency and current consumption requirements of a particular vector power amplifier design.
In implementation, several approaches exist for performing output stage current control. In some embodiments, output stage current shaping is performed using the Autobias module. The Autobias module is illustrated as autobias circuitry 714 and 716 in the embodiments of FIGS. 7 and 8. Similarly, the Autobias module is illustrated as autobias circuitry 1218 in the embodiments of FIGS. 12 and 13, and as autobias circuitry 1718 in the embodiments of FIGS. 17 and 18.
Output stage current control using Autobias is depicted in process flowchart 4800 of the embodiment of FIG. 48. The process begins in step 4810, which includes receiving output power and output signal envelope information of a desired output signal of a vector power amplifier (VPA). In some embodiments, implementing output stage current control using Autobias requires a priori knowledge of the desired output power of the amplifier. Output power information may be in the form of envelope and phase information. For example, in the embodiments of FIGS. 7, 8, 12, 13, 17, and 18, output power information is included in I and Q data components received by the VPA embodiment. In other embodiments, output power information may be received or calculated using other means.
Step 4820 includes calculating a signal according to the output power and output envelope signal information. In embodiments, an Autobias signal is calculated as a function of some measure of the desired output power. For example, the Autobias signal may be calculated as a function of the envelope magnitude of the desired output signal. Referring to the embodiments of FIGS. 7, 8, 12, 13, 17, and 18, for example, it is noted that the Autobias signal (signals 715 and 717 in FIGS. 7 and 8, signal 1228 in FIGS. 12 and 13, and signals 1728 in FIGS. 17 and 18) is calculated according to received I and Q data components of a desired output signal. In certain embodiments, such as the ones described in FIGS. 7, 8, 12, 13, 17, and 18, the Autobias signal is calculated by an Autobias module being provided output power information. In other embodiments, the Autobias signal may be calculated by the I and Q Data Transfer Function module(s) of the VPA. In such embodiments, an Autobias module may not be required in implementation. In embodiments, the I and Q Data Transfer Function module calculates a signal, outputs the signal to a DAC which output signal represents the Autobias signal.
Step 4830 includes applying the calculated signal at an output stage of the VPA, thereby controlling a current of the output stage according to the output power of the desired output signal. In embodiments, step 4830 includes coupling the Autobias signal at the PA stage input of the VPA. This is illustrated, for example, in the embodiments of FIGS. 33 and 42 where Autobias signal 3310 is coupled at the PA stage input of the VPA embodiment. In these embodiments, Autobias signal 3310 controls the bias of the PA stage transistors according to the output power of the desired output signal of the VPA embodiment. For example, Autobias signal 3310 may cause the PA stage transistors to operate in cutoff state when the desired output power is minimal or near zero, thereby drawing little or no output stage current. Similarly, when a maximum output power is desired, Autobias signal 3310 may bias the PA stage transistors to operate in class C, D, E, etc. switching mode, Autobias signal 3310 may also cause the PA stage transistors or FETs to operate in forward or reverse biased states according to the desired output power and signal envelope characteristics.
In other embodiments, step 4830 includes coupling the Autobias signal using pull-up impedances at the PA stage input and optionally the inputs of the driver and pre-driver stages of the VPA. FIGS. 38 and 43 illustrate such embodiments. For example, in the embodiment of FIG. 38, bias impedance 3850 couples Autobias Iref signal 3840 to input terminal 3820 of BJT element 3870. BJT element 3870 represents the PA stage of one PA branch of an exemplary VPA embodiment. Similarly, in the embodiment of FIG. 43, Autobias signal 4310 is coupled to transistors Q1, . . . , Q8 through corresponding bias impedances Z1, . . . , Z8. Transistors Q1, . . . , Q8 represent the PA stage of one branch of an exemplary VPA embodiment.
Embodiments for implementing the Autobias circuitry described above will now be provided. FIG. 27 illustrates three embodiments 2700A, 2700B, and 2700C for implementing the Autobias circuitry. These embodiments are provided for illustrative purposes, and are not limiting. Other embodiments will be apparent to persons skilled in the art(s) based on the teachings contained herein.
In embodiment 2700A, Autobias circuitry 2700A includes an Autobias Transfer Function module 2712, a DAC 2714, and an optional interpolation filter 2718. Autobias circuitry 2700A receives an I and Q Data signal 2710. Autobias Transfer Function module 2712 processes the received I and Q Data signal 2710 to generate an appropriate bias signal 2713. Autobias Transfer Function module 2712 outputs bias signal 2713 to DAC 2714. DAC 2714 is controlled by a DAC clock 2716 which may be generated in Autobias transfer module 2712. DAC 2714 converts bias signal 2713 into an analog signal, and outputs the analog signal to interpolation filter 2718. Interpolation filter 2718, which also serves as an anti-aliasing filter, shapes the DAC's output to generate Autobias signal 2720, illustrated as Bias A in embodiment 5112G. Autobias signal 2720 may be used to bias the PA stage and/or the driver stage, and/or the pre-driver stage of the amplifier. In an embodiment, Autobias signal 2720 may have several other Autobias signals derived therefrom to bias different stages within the PA stage. This can be done using additional circuitry not included in embodiment 2700A.
In contrast, embodiment 2700B illustrates an Autobias circuitry embodiment in which multiple Autobias signals are derived within the Autobias circuitry. As shown in embodiment 2700B, circuit networks 2722, 2726, and 2730, illustrated as circuit networks A, B, and C in embodiment 2700B, are used to derive Autobias signals 2724 and 2728 from Autobias signal 2720. Autobias signals 2720, 2724, and 2728 are used to bias different amplification stages.
Embodiment 2700C illustrates another Autobias circuitry embodiment in which multiple Autobias signals are generated independently within the Autobias Transfer Function module 2712. In embodiment 2700C, Autobias Transfer Function module 2712 generates multiple bias signals according to the received I and Q Data signal 2710. The bias signals may or may not be related. Autobias Transfer Function module 2712 outputs the generated bias signals to subsequent DACs 2732, 2734, and 2736. DACs 2732, 2734, and 2736 are controlled by DAC clock signals 2733, 2735, and 2737, respectively. DACs 2732, 2734, and 2736 convert the received bias signals into analog signals, and output the analog signals to optional interpolation filters 2742, 2744, and 2746. Interpolation filters 2742, 2744, and 2746, which also serve as anti-aliasing filters, shape the DACs outputs to generate Autobias signals 2720, 2724, and 2728. Similar to embodiment 2700B, Autobias signals 2720, 2724, and 2728 are used to bias different amplification stages such as the pre-driver, driver, and PA.
As noted above, Autobias circuitry embodiments according to the present invention are not limited to the ones described in embodiments 2700A, 2700B, and 2700C. A person skilled in the art will appreciate, for example, that Autobias circuitry can be extended to generate any number of bias control signals as required to control the bias of various stages of amplification, and not just three as shown in embodiments 5200B and 5200C, for example.
3.5.3) Output Stage Protection
As described above, output stage embodiments according to embodiments of the present invention are highly power efficient as a result of being able to directly couple outputs at the PA stage using no combining or isolating elements. Certain output stage embodiments in certain circumstances and/or applications, however, may require additional special output stage protection measures in order to withstand such direct coupling approach. This may be the case for example for output stage embodiments such as 5110D, 5120D, 5130D, 5160D, 5150E, 5160E, 5170E, and 5180E illustrated in FIGS. 51D and 51E. Note that, generally, complementary output stage embodiments, such as embodiments 5140D, 5150D, 5110E, 5120E, 5130E, and 5140E of FIGS. 51D and 51E, do not require (but may optionally use) the same output stage protection measures as will be described herein in this section. Output stage protection measures and embodiments to support such measures are now provided.
In one aspect, transistors of distinct branches of a PA stage should generally not simultaneously be in opposite states of operation for extended periods of time. Following a restart or power on with no inputs being supplied to the final PA stages, transients within the PA branches may cause this mode to occur resulting in the PA stage transistors potentially damaging one another or circuit elements connected to the output. Accordingly, embodiments of the present invention further constrain the Autobias module to limit the output current in the PA stage.
In another aspect, it may be desired to ensure that the Autobias module limits the output voltages below the breakdown voltage specification of the PA stage transistors. Accordingly, in embodiments of the present invention, such as the one illustrated in FIG. 42 for example, a feedback element 4210 is coupled between the common collector node of the PA stage and the Autobias module. Feedback element 4210 monitors the collector to base voltage of the PA stage transistors, and may constrain the Autobias signal as necessary to protect the transistors and/or circuit elements.
A person skilled in the art will appreciate that other output stage protection techniques may also be implemented. Furthermore, output stage protection techniques may be implementation specific. For example, depending on the type of PA stage transistors (npn, pnp, NMOS, PMOS, npn/pnp, NMOS/PMOS), different protection functions may be required.
3.6) Harmonic Control
According to embodiments of the present invention, an underlying principle for each branch PA is to maximize the transfer of power to a fundamental harmonic of the output spectrum. Typically, each branch PA may be multi-stage giving rise to a harmonically rich output spectrum. In one aspect, transfer of real power is maximized for the fundamental harmonic. In another aspect, for non-fundamental harmonics, real power transfer is minimized while imaginary power transfer may be tolerated. Harmonic control, according to embodiments of the present invention, may be performed in a variety of ways.
In one embodiment, real power transfer onto the fundamental harmonic is maximized by means of wave-shaping of the PA stage input signals. In practice, several factors play a role in determining the optimal wave shape that results in a maximum real power transfer onto the fundamental harmonic. Embodiment 3400 of the present invention, described above, represents one embodiment that employs waveshaping of PA stage input signals. In embodiment 3400, a plurality of harmonic control circuitry (HCC) networks 3410-{1, . . . , n} are coupled at the PA stage input of each PA branch {1, . . . , n}. HCC networks 3410-{1, . . . , n} have the effect of waveshaping the PA stage inputs, and are typically selected so as to maximize real power transfer to the fundamental harmonic of the summed output spectrum. According to embodiments of the present invention, waveshaping can be used to generate variations of harmonically diverse waveforms. In other embodiments, as can be apparent to a person skilled in the art, waveshaping can be performed at the pre-driver and/or the driver stage.
In another embodiment, harmonic control is achieved by means of waveshaping of the PA stage output. FIG. 43 illustrates an exemplary PA stage embodiment 4300 of the present invention. In embodiment 4300, Autobias signal 4310 is coupled to transistors Q1, . . . , Q8 through corresponding bias impedances Z1, . . . , Z8. Notice that when impedances Z1, . . . , Z8 have different values, transistors Q1, . . . , Q8 have different bias points and can be turned on at different times. This approach of biasing transistors Q1, . . . , Q8 is referred to as staggered bias. Note that using staggered bias, the PA output waveform can be shaped in a variety of ways depending on the values assigned to bias impedances Z1, . . . , Z8.
Harmonic control using staggered bias is depicted in process flowchart 4900 of the embodiment of FIG. 49. The process begins in step 4910, which includes coupling an input signal at first ports of a plurality of transistors of a power amplifier (PA) switching stage. In the example embodiment of FIG. 43, for example, step 4910 corresponds to coupling PA_IN signal 4310 at base terminals of the plurality of transistors Q1, . . . , Q8.
Step 4920 includes coupling a plurality of impedances between the first ports of the plurality of transistors and a bias signal. In the example embodiment of FIG. 43, for example, step 4920 is achieved by coupling impedances Z1, . . . , Z8 between base terminals of respective transistors Q1, . . . , Q8 and Iref signal. In an embodiment, values of the plurality of impedances are selected to cause a time-staggered switching of the input signal, thereby harmonically shaping an output signal of the PA stage. In embodiments, a multi-stage staggered output may be generated by selecting multiple distinct values of the plurality of impedances. In other embodiments, switching is achieved by selecting the plurality of impedances to have equal or substantially equal value.
FIG. 44 illustrates an exemplary wave-shaped PA output using a two-stage staggered bias approach. In a two-stage staggered bias approach, a first set of the PA transistors is first turned on before a second set is turned on. In other words, the bias impedances take two different values. Waveform 4410 represents an input waveform into the PA stage. Waveform 4420 represents the wave-shaped PA output according to a two-stage staggered bias. Notice that output waveform 4420 slopes twice as it transitions from 1 to 0, which corresponds to the first and second sets of transistors turning on successively.
According to embodiments of the present invention, a variety of multi-stage staggered bias approaches may be designed. Bias impedance values may be fixed or variable. Furthermore, bias impedance values may be equal or substantially equal, distinct, or set according to a variety of permutations. For example, referring to the example of FIG. 43, one exemplary permutation might set Z1=Z2=Z3=Z4 and Z5=Z6=Z7=Z8 resulting in a two-stage staggered bias.
3.7) Power Control
Vector power amplification embodiments of the present invention intrinsically provide a mechanism for performing output power control.
FIG. 45 illustrates one approach for performing power control according to an embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 45, phasors {right arrow over (U1)} and {right arrow over (L1)} represent upper and lower constituents of a first phasor {right arrow over (R1)}. {right arrow over (U1)} and {right arrow over (L1)} are constant magnitude and are symmetrically shifted in phase relative to {right arrow over (R1)} by a phase shift angle




  
    φ
    2
  
  .




Phasors {right arrow over (U2)} and {right arrow over (L2)} represent upper and lower constituents of a second phasor {right arrow over (R2)}. {right arrow over (U2)} and {right arrow over (L2)} are constant magnitude and are symmetrically shifted in phase relative to {right arrow over (R2)} by a phase shift angle





  
    φ
    2
  
  +
  
    
      φ
      off
    
    .
  




It is noted, from FIG. 45, that {right arrow over (R1)} and {right arrow over (R2)} are in-phase relative to each other but only differ in magnitude. Furthermore, {right arrow over (U2)} and {right arrow over (L2)} are equally or substantially equally phased shifted relative to {right arrow over (U1)} and {right arrow over (L1)}, respectively. Accordingly, it can be inferred that, according to the present invention, a signal's magnitude can be manipulated without varying its phase shift angle by equally or substantially equally shifting symmetrically its constituent signals.
According to the above observation, output power control can be performed by imposing constraints on the phase shift angle of the constituent signals of a desired output signal. Referring to FIG. 45, for example, by constraining the range of values that phase shift angle




  φ
  2




can take, magnitude constraints can be imposed on phasor {right arrow over (R1)}.

According to embodiments of the present invention, a maximum output power level can be achieved by imposing a minimum phase shift angle condition. For example, referring to FIG. 45, by setting a condition such that




  
    
      φ
      2
    
    ≥
    
      φ
      ff
    
  
  ,




the magnitude of phasor {right arrow over (R1)} is constrained not to exceed a certain maximum level. Similarly, a maximum phase shift angle condition imposes a minimum magnitude level requirement.

In another aspect of power control, output power resolution is defined in terms of a minimum power increment or decrement step size. According to an embodiment of the present invention, output power resolution may be implemented by defining a minimum phase shift angle step size. Accordingly, phase shift angle values are set according to a discrete value range having a pre-determined step size. FIG. 46 illustrates an exemplary phase shift angle spectrum, whereby phase shift angle




  φ
  2




is set according to a pre-determined value range having a minimum step φstep.

A person skilled in the art will appreciate that a variety of power control schemes may be implemented in a fashion similar to the techniques described above. In other words, various power control algorithms can be designed, according to the present invention, by setting corresponding constraints on phase shift angle values. It is also apparent, based on the description above of data transfer functions, that power control schemes can be naturally incorporated into a transfer function implementation.
3.8) Exemplary Vector Power Amplifier Embodiment
FIG. 47 illustrates an exemplary embodiment 4700 of a vector power amplifier according to the present invention. Embodiment 4700 is implemented according to the Direct Cartesian 2-Branch VPA method.
Referring to FIG. 47, signals 4710 and 4712 represent incoming signals from a transfer function stage. The transfer function stage is not shown in FIG. 47. Block 4720 represents a quadrature generator which may be optionally implemented according to an embodiment of the present invention. Quadrature generator 4720 generates clock signals 4730 and 4732 to be used by vector modulators 4740 and 4742, respectively. Similarly, signals 4710 and 4712 are input into vector modulators 4740 and 4742. As described above, vector modulators 4740 and 4742 generate constant envelope constituents that are, subsequently, processed by a PA stage. In embodiment 4700, the PA stage is multi-stage, whereby each PA branch includes a pre-driver stage 4750-4752, a driver stage 4760-4762, and a power amplifier stage 4770-4772.
Further illustrated in FIG. 47 are Autobias signals 4774 and 4776, and terminals 4780 and 4782 for coupling harmonic control circuitry and networks. Terminal node 4780 represents the output terminal of the vector power amplifier, and is obtained by direct coupling of the two PA branches' outputs.
4. Additional Exemplary Embodiments and Implementations
4.1) Overview
Exemplary VPA implementations according to embodiments of the present invention will be provided in this section. Advantages of these VPA implementations will be appreciated by persons skilled in the art based on the teachings herein. We briefly describe below some of these advantages before presenting in more detail the exemplary VPA implementations.
4.1.1) Control of Output Power and Power Efficiency
The exemplary VPA implementations enable several layers of functionality for performing power control and/or for controlling power efficiency using circuitry within the VPA. FIG. 52 illustrates this functionality at a high level using a MISO VPA embodiment 5200. MISO VPA embodiment 5200 is a 2 input single output VPA with optional driver and pre-driver stages in each branch of the VPA. As in previously described embodiments, the input bias voltage or current to each amplification stage (e.g., pre-driver stage, driver stage, etc.) of the VPA is controlled using a bias signal (also referred to as Autobias in other embodiments). In embodiment 5200, separate bias signals Bias C, Bias B, and Bias A are coupled to the pre-driver, driver, and PA stages, respectively, of the VPA. Additionally, VPA embodiment 5200 includes power supply signals (Pre-Driver VSUPPLY, Driver VSUPPLY, and Output Stage VSUPPLY) that are used to power respective stages of the VPA. In embodiments, these power supply signals are generated using voltage controlled power supplies and can be further used to bias their respective amplifications stages, thereby providing additional functionality for controlling the overall power efficiency of the VPA and for performing power control, as well as other functions of the VPA. For example, when controlled independently, the power supply signals and bias signals can be used to operate different amplification stages of the VPA at different power supply voltages and bias points, enabling a wide output power dynamic range for the VPA. In embodiments the voltage controlled power supplies can be implemented as continuously variable supplies such as voltage controlled switching supplies which provide variable voltage supplies to the appropriate amplification stage. In other embodiments the voltage controlled power supply can be implemented by using switches to provide different power supply voltages. For example, a VPA output stage and/or optional driver stages and/or optional pre-driver stages power supply could be switched between 3.3V, 1.8V, and 0V depending on the desired operating parameters.
4.1.2) Error Compensation and/or Correction
The exemplary VPA implementations provide different approaches for monitoring and/or compensating for errors in the VPA. These errors may be due, among other factors, to process and/or temperature variations in the VPA, phase and amplitude errors in the vector modulation circuitry, gain and phase imbalances in branches of the VPA, and distortion in the MISO amplifier (see, for example, Section 3.4.5 above). In previously described VPA embodiments, part of this functionality was embodied in the process detector circuitry (e.g., process detector 792 in FIG. 7A, process detector 1282 in FIG. 12, process detector 1772 in FIG. 17). These approaches can be classified as feedforward, feedback, and hybrid feedforward/feedback techniques, and can be implemented in a variety of ways as will be further discussed in the following sections that describe the exemplary VPA implementations. A conceptual description of these error monitoring and compensation approaches will be now provided.
FIGS. 54A and 54B are block diagrams that illustrate at a high level feedforward techniques for compensating for errors in a VPA. Feedforward techniques rely on a priori knowledge of expected errors in the VPA in order to pre-compensate for these errors within the VPA. Thus, feedforward techniques include an error measurement phase (typically performed in a test and characterization process) and a pre-compensation phase using the error measurements.
FIG. 54A illustrates a process 5400A for generating an error table or function that describes expected errors in I data and Q data at the output of the VPA (error measurement phase). Such errors are typically due to imperfections in the VPA. Process 5400A is typically performed in a testing lab prior to finalizing the VPA design, and includes measuring at the output of a receiver I and Q values that correspond to a range of I and Q values at the input of the VPA. Typically, the input I and Q values are selected to generate a representative range of the 360° degrees polar space (for example, the I and Q values may be selected at a uniform spacing of 30° degrees). Subsequently, error differences between the input I and Q values and the output I and Q values are calculated. For example, after measuring I and Q at the output of the receiver for a particular set of I and Q input values, a compare circuitry calculates as Ierror and Qerror the differences in I data and Q data between the input I and Q values and the receiver output I and Q values. Ierror and Qerror represent the expected errors in I and Q at the output of the VPA for the particular set of I and Q input values.
In an embodiment, the receiver is integrated with the VPA, or is provided by an external calibration and/or testing device. Alternatively, the receiver is the receiver module in the device employing the VPA (e.g., the receiver in a cellular phone). In this alternative embodiment, the VPA error table and/or feedback information can be generated by this receiver module in the device.
The calculated Ierror and Qerror values are used to generate an error table or function representative of expected I and Q errors for various I and Q input values. In embodiments, the calculated Ierror and Qerror values are further interpolated to generate error values for an augmented range of I and Q input values, based on which the error table or function is generated.
FIG. 54B illustrates feedforward error pre-compensation (pre-compensation phase) according to an embodiment of the present invention. As illustrated, I and Q input values are corrected for any expected Ierror and Qerror values as determined by an error table or function, prior to amplification by the VPA. I and Q error pre-compensation may be performed at different stages and/or at different temperatures and/or at different operating parameters within the VPA. In the embodiment of FIG. 54B, error correction occurs prior to the amplification stage of the VPA. For example, I and Q error correction may be performed by the transfer function module of the VPA, such as transfer function modules 1216 and 1726 of FIGS. 12 and 17, for example. Several methods exist for implementing I and Q error correction in the transfer function module of the VPA including using look up tables and/or digital logic to implement an error function. Typically, feedforward techniques require data storage such as RAM or NVRAM, for example, to store data generated in the measurement phase.
In contrast to feedforward techniques, feedback techniques do not pre-compensate for errors but perform real-time measurements inside or at the output of the VPA to detect any errors or deviations due to process or temperature variations, for example. FIG. 55 is a block diagram that conceptually illustrates an exemplary Cartesian feedback error correction technique according to embodiments of the present invention. As will be further described below, FIG. 55 illustrates a receiver-based feedback technique, in which the output of the VPA is received by a receiver, before being fed back to the VPA. Other feedback techniques according to embodiments of the present invention will be further described below. Feedback techniques may require additional circuitry to perform these real-time measurements, which may be made at different stages within the VPA, but require minimal or no data storage. Several implementations exist for feedback error correction as will be further described in the description of the exemplary VPA implementations below.
Hybrid feedforward/feedback techniques include both feedforward and feedback error pre-compensation and/or correction components. For example, a hybrid feedforward/feedback technique may pre-compensate for errors but may also use low rate periodical feedback mechanisms to supplement feedforward pre-compensation.
4.1.3) Multi-Band Multi-Mode VPA Operation
The exemplary VPA implementations provide several VPA architectures for concurrently supporting multiple frequency bands (e.g., quad band) and/or multiple technology modes (e.g., tri mode) for data transmission. Advantages of these VPA architectures will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art based on the teachings to be provided herein. In embodiments, the VPA architectures allow for using a single PA branch for supporting both TDD (Time Division Duplex) and FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) based standards. In other embodiments, the VPA architectures allow for the elimination of costly and power inefficient components at the output stage (e.g., isolators), typically required for FDD based standards. For the purpose of illustration and not limitation, frequency band allocation on lower and upper spectrum bands for various communication standards is provided in FIG. 53. Note that the DCS 1800 (Digital Cellular System 1800) and the PCS 1900 (Personal Communications Service 1900) bands can support different GSM-based implementations, also known as GSM-1800 and GSM-1900. The 3G TDD bands are allocated for third generation time division duplex standards such as UMTS TDD (Universal Mobile Telephone System) and TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), for example. The 3G FDD bands are allocated for third generation frequency division duplex standards such as WCDMA (Wideband CDMA), for example.
As will be appreciated by persons skilled in the art based on the teachings herein, advantages enabled by the exemplary VPA implementations exist in various aspects in addition to those described above. In the following, a more detailed description of the exemplary VPA implementations will be provided. This includes a description of different implementations of the digital control circuitry of the VPA followed by a description of different implementations of the analog core of the VPA. Embodiments of the present invention are not limited to the specific implementations described herein. As will be understood by persons skilled in the art based on the teachings herein, several other VPA implementations may be obtained by combining features provided in the exemplary VPA implementations. Accordingly, the exemplary VPA implementations described below do not represent an exhaustive listing of VPA implementations according to embodiments of the present invention, and other implementations based on teachings contained herein are also within the scope of the present invention. For example, certain digital control circuitry could be integrated or combined with a baseband processor. In addition, certain analog control circuitry such as quadrature generators and vector modulators can be implemented using digital control circuitry. In an embodiment, the VPA system can be implemented in its entirety using digital circuitry and can be integrated completely with a baseband processor.
4.2) Digital Control Module
The digital control module of the VPA includes digital circuitry that is used, among other functions, for signal generation, performance monitoring, and VPA operation control. In Section 3, the signal generation functions of the digital control module (i.e., generating constant envelope signals) were described in detail with reference to the transfer function module (state machine) of the digital control module, in embodiments 700, 1200, and 1700, for example. The performance monitoring functions of the digital control module include functions for monitoring and correcting for errors in the operation of the VPA and/or functions for controlling the bias of different stages of the VPA. The VPA operation control functions of the digital control module include a variety of control functions related to the operation of the VPA (e.g., powering up or programming VPA modules). In certain embodiments, these control functions may be optional. In other embodiments, these control functions are accessible through the digital control module to external processors connected to the VPA. In other embodiments, these functions are integrated with baseband processors or other digital circuitry. Other functions are also performed by the digital control module in addition to those described above. Digital control module functions and implementations will now be provided in further detail.
FIG. 56 is a high level illustration of a digital control module embodiment 5600 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Digital control module embodiment 5600 includes an input interface 5602, an output interface 5604, a state machine 5606, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 5608, and a NVRAM (Non-Volatile RAM) 5610. In embodiments, Ram 5608, and/or NVRAM 5610 may be optional.
Input interface 5602 provides a plurality of buses and/or ports for inputting signals into digital control module 5600. These buses and/or ports include, for example, buses and/or ports for inputting I and Q data signals, control signals provided by an external processor, and/or clock signals. In an embodiment, input interface 5602 includes an I/O bus. In another embodiment, input interface 5602 includes a data bus for receiving feedback signals from the analog core of the VPA. In another embodiment, input interface 5602 includes ports for reading values out of digital control module 5600. In an embodiment, values are read out of digital control module 5600 by an external processor (e.g., a baseband processor) connected to digital control module 5600.
Output interface 5604 provides a plurality of output buses and/or ports for outputting signals from digital control module 5600. These output buses and/or ports include, for example, buses and/or ports for outputting amplitude information signals (used to generate constant envelope signals), bias control signals (Autobias signals), voltage control signals (power supply signals), and output select signals.
State machine 5606 performs various functions related to the signal generation and/or performance monitoring functions of digital control module 5600. In an embodiment, state machine 5606 includes a transfer function module, as described in Section 3, for performing signal generation functions. In another embodiment, state machine 5606 includes modules for generating, among other types of signals, bias control signals, power control signals, gain control signals, and phase control signals. In another embodiment, state machine 5606 includes modules for performing error pre-compensation in a feedforward error correction system.
RAM 5608 and/or NVRAM 5610 are optional components of digital control module 5600. In embodiments, RAM 5608 and NVRAM 5610 reside externally of digital control module 5600 and may be accessible to digital control module 5600 through data buses connected to digital control module 5600 via input interface 5602, for example. RAM 5608 and/or NVRAM 5610 may or may not be needed depending on the specific VPA implementation. For example, a VPA implementation employing feedforward techniques for error pre-compensation may require RAM 5608 or NVRAM 5610 to store error tables or functions. On the other hand, a feedback technique for error correction may solely rely on digital logic modules in the state machine and may not require RAM 5608 or NVRAM 5610 storage. Similarly, the amount of RAM 5608 and NVRAM 5610 storage may depend on the specific VPA implementation. Typically, when used, NVRAM 5610 is used for storing data that is not generated in real time and/or that must be retained when power is turned off. This includes, for example, error tables and/or error values such as scalar values and angular values generated in the testing and characterization phase of the VPA system and/or look up tables used by transfer functions modules.
FIG. 57 illustrates an exemplary digital control module implementation 5700 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Digital control module implementation 5700 illustrates in particular an exemplary input interface 5602 and an exemplary output interface 5604 of an exemplary VPA digital control module 5700. As will be further described below, signals of the input and output interfaces 5602 and 5604 of VPA digital control module 5700 correlate directly with signals from the analog core of the VPA and/or signals to/from one or more external processors/controllers connected to the VPA. In the example embodiments described in the sections above, the analog core of the VPA was represented by analog circuitry 186 together with PA stage 190-{1, . . . , n} in FIG. 1E, for example. It is noted that bit widths of data buses and/or signals of the input and output interfaces in FIG. 57 are provided for the purpose of illustration only and are not limiting.
The input interface 5602 of exemplary digital control module 5700 includes an A/D IN bus 5702, a digital I/O bus 5704, and a plurality of control signals 5706-5730. In other digital control module implementations, the input interface 5602 may include more or less data buses, programming buses, and/or control signals.
A/D IN bus 5702 carries feedback information from the analog core of the VPA to the digital control module 5700. Feedback information can be used, among other functions, to monitor the output power of the VPA and/or for amplitude and/or phase variations in branches of the VPA. As illustrated in FIG. 57, an A/D converter 5732 converts from analog to digital feedback information received from the analog core of the VPA (using A/D IN signal 5736) before sending it on A/D IN bus 5702 to the digital control module 5700. In an embodiment, the digital control module 5700 controls a clock signal A/D CLK 5734 of the A/D converter 5732. In another embodiment, the digital control module 5700 controls an input selector to the A/D converter 5732 to select between multiple feedback signals at the input of the A/D converter 5732. In an embodiment, this is performed using A/D Input Selector signals 5738-5746.
Digital I/O bus 5704 carries data and control signals into and out of the digital control module 5700 from and to one or more processors or controllers that may be connected to the VPA. In an embodiment, some of control signals 5706-5730 are used to inform the digital control module 5700 of the type of information to expect on (or that is present on) digital I/O bus 5704. For example, PC/(I/Q)n signal 5724 indicates to the digital control module 5700 whether power control information or I/Q data is being sent over digital I/O bus 5704. Similarly, I/Qn signal 5720 indicates to the digital control module 5700 whether I or Q data is being sent over digital I/O bus 5704.
Other control signals of the input interface 5602 of the VPA digital control module 5700 include Digital Enable/Disablen 5706, PRGM/RUNn 5708, READ/WRITEn 5710, CLK OUT 5712, CLK_IN×2 Enable/Disablen 5714, CLK_IN×4 Enable/Disablen 5716, CLK_IN 5718, TX/RXn 5726, SYNTH PRGM/SYNTH RUNn 5728, and OUTPUT SEL/LATCHn 5730.
Digital Enable/Disablen signal 5706 controls the power-up, reset, and shut down of the VPA. Signals to power-up, reset, or shut down the VPA typically come from a processor connected to the VPA. For example, when used in a cellular phone, a baseband processor or controller of the cellular phone may shut down the VPA in receive mode and enable it in transmit mode.
PRGM/RUNn signal 5708 indicates to the digital control module 5700 whether it is in programming or in run mode. In programming mode, the digital control module 5700 can be programmed to enable the desired operation of the VPA. For example, memory (RAM 5608, NVRAM 5610) bits of the digital control module 5700 can be programmed to indicate the standard to be used (e.g., WCDMA, EDGE, GSM, etc.) for communication. Programming of digital control module 5700 is done using digital I/O bus 5704.
In an embodiment, the VPA is programmed and/or re-programmed (partially or completely) after it is installed in (or integrated with) the final product or device employing the VPA. For example, when used in a cellular phone, the VPA can be programmed after the cellular phone is manufactured to provide the cellular phone with new, additional, modified or different features, such as features related to (1) supported waveforms, (2) power control, (3) enhanced efficiency, and/or (4) power-up and power-down profiles. The VPA can also be programmed to remove waveforms or other features as desired by the network provider.
Programming of the VPA may be payment based. For example, the VPA may be programmed to include features and enhancements selected and purchased by the end-user.
In an embodiment, the VPA is programmed after the device is manufactured using any well known method or technique, including but not limited to: (1) programming the VPA using the programming interface of the device employing the VPA; (2) programming the VPA by storing programming data on a memory card readable by the device (a SIM card, for example, in the case of a cellular phone); and/or (3) programming the VPA by transferring programming data to the VPA wirelessly by the network provider or other source.
READ/WRITEn signal 5710 indicates to the digital control module 5700 whether data is to be read from or written to the digital control module storage (RAM 5608 or NVRAM 5610) via digital I/O bus 5704. When data is being read out of the digital control module 5700, CLK OUT signal 5712 indicates timing information for reading from digital I/O bus 5704.
CLK_IN signal 5718 provides a reference clock signal to the digital control module 5700. Typically, the reference clock signal is selected according to the communication standards supported by the VPA. For example, in a dual-mode WCDMA/GSM system, it is desirable that the reference clock signal be a multiple of the WCDMA chip rate (3.84 MHz) and the GSM channel raster (200 KHz), with 19.2 MHz being a popular rate as the least common multiple of both. Further, CLK_IN signal 5718 can be made a multiple of the reference clock signal. In an embodiment, CLK_IN×2 Enable/Disablen 5714, CLK_IN×4 Enable/Disablen 5716 can be used to indicate to the VPA digital control module 5700 that a multiple of the reference clock is being provided.
TX/RXn signal 5726 indicates to the digital control module 5700 when the system (e.g., cellular phone) employing the VPA is going into transmit or receive mode. In an embodiment, the digital control module 5700 is notified a short amount of time prior to the system going into transmit mode in order for it to power up the VPA. In another embodiment, the digital control module 5700 is notified when the system is going into receive mode in order for it to enter a sleep mode or to shutdown the VPA.
SYNTH PRGM/SYNTH RUNn signal 5728 is used to program the synthesizer that provides the reference frequency to the VPA (such as synthesizers 5918 and 5920 shown in FIG. 59). When SYNTH PRGM 5728 is high, the VPA digital control module 5700 can expect to receive data for programming the synthesizer on digital I/O bus 5704. Typically, programming of the synthesizer is needed when selecting the VPA transmission frequency. When SYNTH RUN 5728 goes high, the synthesizer is instructed to run. The synthesizer may be integrated with the VPA system or provided as an external component or subsystem.
OUTPUT SEL/LATCHn signal 5730 is used to select the VPA output to be used for transmission. This may or may not be needed depending on the number of outputs of the VPA. When OUTPUT SEL 5730 goes high, the digital control module 5700 expects to receive data for selecting the output on digital I/O bus 5704. When LATCH 5730 goes high, the digital control module 5700 ensures that the VPA output used for transmission is held (cannot be changed) for the duration of the current transmit sequence.
The output interface 5604 of exemplary digital control module 5700 includes a plurality of data buses (5748, 5750, 5752, 5754, 5756, 5758, 5760, 5762, 5764, and 5766), a programming bus 5799, and a plurality of control signals (5768, 5770, 5772, 5744, 5776, 5778, 5780, 5782, 5784, 5786, 5788, 5790, 5792, 5794, 5796, and 5798). In other embodiments of digital control module 5700, the output interface 5604 may have more or less data buses, programming buses, and/or control signals.
Data buses 5752, 5754, 5756, and 5758 carry digital information from the digital control module 5700 that is used to generate the substantially constant envelope signals in the analog core of the VPA. Note that exemplary digital control module 5700 may be used in a 4-Branch VPA embodiment (see Section 3.1) or a 2-Branch VPA embodiment (see Section 3.3). For example, digital information carried by data buses 5752, 5754, 5756, and 5758 correspond to signals 722, 724, 726, and 728 in the embodiment of FIG. 7A or signals 1720, 1722, 1724, and 1726 in the embodiment of FIG. 17, and may be generated by the digital control module 5700 according to equations (5) (for a 4-Branch VPA embodiment) and (18) (for a 2-Branch VPA embodiment). Digital information carried by data buses 5752, 5754, 5756, and 5758 is converted from digital to analog using respective Digital-to-Analog Converters (DACs 01-04) to generate analog signals 5753, 5755, 5757, and 5759, respectively. Analog signals 5753, 5755, 5757, and 5759 are input into vector modulators in the analog core of the VPA as will be further described below with reference to the VPA analog core implementations. In an embodiment, DACs 01-04 are controlled and synchronized by a Vector MOD DAC CLK signal 5770 provided by the digital control module. Further, DACs 01-04 are provided the same central reference voltage VREF_D signal 5743.
Data buses 5760 and 5762 carry digital information from the digital control module 5700 that is used to generate bias voltage signals for the PA amplification stage and the driver amplification stage of the VPA (see FIG. 52 for illustration of different amplification stages of the VPA). In another embodiments additional control functions such as pre-driver Stage Bias Control is used. Digital information carried by data bus 5760 is converted from digital to analog using DAC_05 to generate output stage bias signal 5761. Similarly, digital information carried by data bus 5762 is converted from digital to analog using DAC_06 to generate driver stage bias signal 5763. Output stage bias signal 5761 and driver stage bias signal 5763 correspond, for example, to bias signals A and B illustrated in embodiment 5100H. In an embodiment, DACs 05 and 06 are controlled and synchronized using an Autobias DAC CLK signal 5772, and are provided the same central reference voltage VREF_E signal 5745.
Data buses 5764 and 5766 carry digital information from the digital control module 5700 that is used to generate voltage control signals for the output stage and the driver stage of the VPA. Digital information carried by data bus 5764 is converted from digital to analog using DAC_07 to generate output stage voltage control signal 5765. Similarly, digital information carried by data bus 5766 is converted from digital to analog using DAC_08 to generate driver stage voltage control signal 5767. Output stage voltage control signal 5765 and driver stage voltage control 5767 are used to generate supply voltages for the output stage and the driver stage, providing a further method for controlling the voltage of the output stage and driver stage of the VPA. In an embodiment, DACs 07 and 08 are controlled and synchronized using a Voltage Control DAC CLK signal 5774, and are provided the same central reference voltage VREF_F signal 5747.
Data buses 5748 and 5750 carry digital information from the digital control module 5700 that is used to generate gain and phase balance control signals. In an embodiment, the gain and phase balance control signals are generated in response to feedback gain and phase information received from the analog core of the VPA on A/D IN bus 5702. Digital information carried by data bus 5748 is converted from digital to analog using DAC_09 to generate analog gain balance control signal 5749. Similarly, digital information carried by data bus 5750 is converted from digital to analog using DAC_10 to generate analog phase balance control 5751. Gain and phase balance control signals 5749 and 5751 provide one mechanism for regulating gain and phase in the analog core of the VPA. In an embodiment, DACs 09 and 10 are controlled and synchronized using a Balance DAC CLK signal 5768, and are provided the same central reference voltage VREF_B 5739.
Programming bus 5799 carries digital instructions from the digital control module 5700 that are used to program frequency synthesizer or synthesizers in the analog core of the VPA. In an embodiment, digital instructions carried by programming bus 5799 are generated according to data received on digital I/O bus 5704, when SYNTH PRGM signal 5728 is high. Digital instructions for programming the frequency synthesizers include instructions for setting the appropriate synthesizer (HI Band or Low Band) to generate a frequency according to the selected communication standard. In an embodiment, programming bus 5799 is a 3-wire programming bus.
In addition to the data and programming buses described above, the output interface 5604 includes a plurality of control signals.
In conjunction with programming bus 5799, used for programming the frequency synthesizers of the analog VPA core, HI Band Enable/Disablen and Low Band Enable/Disablen control signals 5796 and 5798 are generated to control which of a high band frequency synthesizer and a low band frequency synthesizer of the analog VPA core is enabled/disabled.
Control signals 5738, 5740, 5742, 5744, and 5746 control an input selector for multiplexing feedback signals from the analog core of the VPA onto A/D IN input signal 5736 of A/D converter 5732. In an embodiment, control signals 5738, 5740, 5744, and 5746 control the multiplexing of a power output feedback signal, a differential branch amplitude feedback signal, and a differential branch phase feedback signal on A/D IN signal 5736. Other feedback signals may be available in other embodiments. In an embodiment, the feedback signals are multiplexed according to a pre-determined multiplexing cycle. In another embodiment, certain feedback signals are periodically carried by A/D IN signal 5736, while others are requested on-demand by the digital control module.
Output select control signals 5776, 5778, 5780, 5782, and 5784 are generated by the digital control module 5700 in order to select a VPA output, when the particular VPA implementation supports a plurality of outputs for different frequency bands and/or technology modes. In an embodiment, output select control signals 5776, 5778, 5780, 5782, and 5782 are generated according to digital control module input signal 5730. In the example implementation of FIG. 57, the digital control module 5700 provides five output select control signals for selecting one of five different VPA outputs. In an embodiment, output select control signals 5776, 5778, 5780, 5782, and 5784 control circuitry within the analog core of the VPA in order to power up circuitry corresponding to the selected VPA output and to power off circuitry corresponding to the remaining unselected VPA outputs. In embodiments, at any time, output select control signals 5776, 5778, 5780, 5782, and 5784 ensure that circuitry corresponding to a single VPA output are powered up, when the VPA is in transmit mode. A different digital control module embodiment may have more or less output select control signals depending on the particular number of VPA outputs supported by the particular analog core implementation.
Vector MOD HI Band(s)/Vector MOD Low Band(s)n control signal 5786 is generated by the digital control module 5700 to indicate whether a high band frequency modulation set or a low band frequency modulation set of vector modulators is to be used in the analog core of the VPA. In an embodiment, the high band and the low band vector modulators have different characteristics, allowing each set to be more suitable for a range of modulation frequencies. Control signal 5786 is generated according to the selected output of the VPA. In an embodiment, control signal 5786 controls circuitry within the analog core of the VPA in order to ensure that the selected set of vector modulators is powered up and that the other set(s) of vector modulators are powered off. In another embodiment, control signal 5786 controls circuitry within the analog core of the VPA in order to couple a set of interpolation filters to the selected set of vector modulators.
3G HI Band/Normaln control signal 5788 is an optional control signal which may be used, if necessary, to enable the VPA to support the wide range High frequency band. In an embodiment, control signal 5788 may force more current through the output stage circuitry of the analog core and/or modify the output impedance characteristics of the VPA.
Filter Response 1/Filter Response 2n control signal 5790 is an optional control signal which may be used to dynamically change the response of interpolation filters in the analog core of the VPA. This may be needed as the interpolation filters have different optimal responses for different communication standards. For example, the optimal filter response has a 3 dB corner frequency around 5 MHz for WCDMA or EDGE, while this frequency is around 400 KHz for GSM. Accordingly, control signal 5790 allows for optimizing the interpolation filters according to the used communication standard.
Attenuator control signals 5792 and 5794 are optional control signals which may be used, if necessary, to provide additional output power control features and functions. For example, attenuator control signals 5792 and 5794 could be configured to enable/disable RF attenuators on the output of the VPA. These attenuators may be required based on the specific VPA implementation, which could be fabricated using Silicon, GaAs, or CMOS processes.
FIG. 58 illustrates another exemplary digital control module 5800 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Exemplary digital control module 5800 is similar in many respects to digital control module 5700. In particular, both embodiments 5700, 5800 have the same input interface 5602, and substantial portions of the output interface (the output interface in FIG. 58 is labeled with reference number 5604′). The differences between exemplary embodiments 5700 and 5800 relate to the type of feedback information being provided to the digital control module. Specifically, the two embodiments 5700 and 5800 are designed to operate with distinctly different feedback mechanisms for error correction. These mechanisms will be further described below in Section 4.3 with reference to the exemplary analog core implementations.
Exemplary implementation 5800 includes different input select control signals 5808, 5810, and 5812 compared to exemplary implementation 5700. Input select control signals 5810 and 5812 control whether feedback information is to be received from the high band or the low band analog circuitry of the VPA, depending on which band is in use. Input select control signal I/Qn 5808 controls the multiplexing of I and Q feedback data from the analog core of the VPA. In an embodiment, control signal 5812 allows sequential switching between I data and Q data on A/D IN signal 5736.
In further distinction to exemplary embodiment 5700, exemplary embodiment 5800 include an additional data bus 5802, which carries digital information from the digital control module 5800 used to generate an automatic gain control signal 5806. Automatic gain control signal 5806 is used to control the gain of an amplifier circuit used in the feedback mechanism in the analog core of the VPA. Further description of this component of the feedback mechanism will be provided below. In an embodiment, digital information carried by data bus 5802 is converted from digital to analog by DAC_11 to generate analog signal 5806. DAC_11 is controlled by a clock signal 5804 provided by the digital control module, and is provided VREF_B signal 5739 as a central reference voltage.
It is noted that exemplary digital control modules 5700 and 5800 illustrate some of the typical input and output digital control module signals that may be used in a digital control module implementation. More or less input and output signals may also be used, as will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art based on the teachings herein, depending on the system in which the VPA is being used and/or the specific VPA analog core to be used with the digital control module. In an embodiment, exemplary digital control module implementations 5700 and 5800 may be used in conjunction with a VPA analog core using feedback only, feedforward only, or both feedback and feedforward error correction. When used in a feedforward only approach, feedback elements and/or signals (e.g., A/D IN 5702, control signals 5738, 5740, 5742, 5744, 5746, gain and phase balance control signals 5749 and 5751) may be disabled or eliminated. Accordingly, variations of exemplary digital control module implementations 5700 and 5800 are within the scope of embodiments of the present invention.
4.3) VPA Analog Core
In this section, various exemplary implementations of the VPA analog core will be provided. As will be described below, the various exemplary implementations share a large number of components, circuits, and/or signals, with the main differences relating to the output stage architecture, the adopted error correction feedback mechanism, and/or the actual semiconductor material used in chip fabrication. As will be understood by a person skilled in the art based on the teachings herein, other VPA analog core implementations are also conceivable by interchanging, adding, and/or removing features among the various exemplary implementations described below. Accordingly, embodiments of the present invention are not to be limited to the exemplary implementations described herein.
4.3.1) VPA Analog Core Implementation A
FIG. 59 illustrates a VPA analog core implementation 5900 according to an embodiment of the present invention. In an embodiment, the input signals of analog core 5900 connect directly or indirectly (through DACs) to output signals from the output interface 5604 of digital control module 5600. Similarly, feedback signals from analog core 5900 connect directly or indirectly (through DACs) to the input interface of the digital control module 5600. For illustrative purposes, the analog core 5900 is shown in FIG. 59 as being connected to digital control module 5700, as indicated by the same numeral signals on both FIG. 57 and FIG. 59.
Analog core implementation 5900 is a 2-Branch VPA embodiment. This implementation 5900, however, can be readily modified to a 4-Branch or a CPCP VPA embodiment, as will be apparent to persons skilled in the art based on the teachings herein.
At a high level, analog core 5900 includes an input stage for receiving data signals from the digital control module 5700, a vector modulation stage for generating substantially constant envelope signals, and an amplification output stage for amplifying and outputting the desired VPA output signal. Additionally, analog core 5900 includes power supply circuitry for controlling and delivering power to the different stages of the analog core, optional output stage protection circuitry, and optional circuitry for generating and providing feedback information to the digital control module of the VPA.
The input stage of VPA analog core 5900 includes an optional interpolation filter bank (5910, 5912, 5914, and 5916) and a plurality of switches 5964, 5966, 5968, and 5970. Interpolation filters 5910, 5912, 5914, and 5916, which may also serve as anti-aliasing filters, shape the analog outputs 5753, 5755, 5757, and 5759 of DACs 01-04 to generate the desired output waveform. In an embodiment, the response of interpolation filters 5910, 5912, 5914, and 5916 is dynamically changed using control signal 5790 from the digital control module 5700. Digital control module signal 5790 may, for example, control switches within interpolation filters 5910, 5912, 5914, and 5916 to cause a change in active circuitry (enable/disable RC circuitry) within filters 5910, 5912, 5914, and 5916. This may be needed as interpolation filters 5910, 5912, 5914, and 5916 have different optimal responses for different communication standards. It should be noted that interpolation filters 5910, 5912, 5914, and 5916 can be implemented using digital circuitry such as FIR filters or programmable FIR filters. When implemented digitally, these filters can be included within the VPA system or integrated with a baseband processor.
Subsequently, the outputs of interpolation filters 5910, 5912, 5914, and 5916 are switched using switches 5964, 5966, 5968, and 5970 to connect to either an upper band path 5964 or a lower band path 5966 of the VPA analog core 5900. This determination between the upper and lower band paths is usually made by the digital control module 5700 based on the selected frequency range for transmission by the VPA. For example, the lower band path 5966 is used for GSM-900, while the upper band path 5964 is used for WCDMA. In an embodiment, switches 5964, 5966, 5968, and 5970 are controlled by Vector MOD HI Band(s)/Vector MOD Low Band(s)n signal 5786, provided by the digital control module 5700. Signal 5786 controls the coupling of each of switches 5964, 5966, 5968, and 5970 to respective first or second inputs, thereby controlling the coupling of the outputs of interpolation filters 5910, 5912, 5914, and 5916 to the either the upper path 5964 or lower path 5966 of the VPA analog core 5900.
The vector modulation stage of VPA analog core 5900 includes a plurality of vector modulators 5922, 5924, 5926, and 5928, divided between the upper band path 5964 and the lower band path 5966 of the analog core 5900. Based on the selected band of operation, either the upper band path vector modulators (5922, 5924) or the lower band path vector modulators (5926, 5928) are active.
In an embodiment, the operation of vector modulators 5922, 5924 or 5926, 5928 is similar to the operation of vector modulators 1750 and 1752 in the embodiment of FIG. 17, for example. Vector modulators 5922 and 5924 (or 5926 and 5928) receive input signals 5919, 5921, 5923, and 5925 (5927, 5929, 5931, and 5933) from optional interpolation filters 5910, 5912, 5914, and 5916, respectively. Input signals 5919, 5921, 5923, and 5925 (or 5927, 5929, 5931, and 5933) include amplitude information that is used to generate the constant envelope signals by the vector modulators. Further, vector modulators 5922 and 5924 (or 5926 and 5928) receive a HI Band RF_CLK signal 5935 (LOW BAND RF_CLK signal 5937) from a HI Band(s) Frequency Synthesizer 5918 (Low Band(s) Frequency Synthesizer 5920). HI Band(s) Frequency Synthesizer 5918 (Low Band(s) Frequency Synthesizer 5920) are optionally located externally or in the VPA analog core. In an embodiment, HI Band(s) Frequency Synthesizer 5918 (Low Band(s) Frequency Synthesizer 5920) generates RF frequencies in the upper band range of 1.7-1.98 GHz (lower band range of 824-915 MHz). In another embodiment, HI Band(s) Frequency Synthesizer 5918 and Low Band(s) Frequency Synthesizer 5920 are controlled by digital control module signals 5796 and 5798, respectively. Signals 5796 and 5798, for example, power up the appropriate frequency synthesizer according to the selected transmission frequency band, and instruct the selected synthesizer to generate a RF frequency clock according to the selected transmission frequency.
Vector modulators 5922 and 5924 (or 5926 and 5928) modulate input signals 5919, 5921, 5923, and 5925 (5927, 5929, 5931, and 5933) with HI BAND RF_CLK signal 5935 (LOW BAND RF_CLK signal 5937). In an embodiment, vector modulators 5922 and 5924 (or 5926 and 5928) modulate the input signals with appropriately derived and/or phase shifted versions of HI BAND RF_CLK signal 5935 (LOW BAND RF_CLK signal 5937), and combine the generated modulated signals to generate substantially constant envelope signals 5939 and 5941 (5943 and 5945).
In another embodiment, vector modulators 5922 and 5924 (or 5926 and 5928) further receive a phase balance control signal 5751 from the VPA digital control module. Phase balance control signal 5751 controls vector modulators 5922 and 5924 (or 5926 and 5928) to cause a change in phase in constant envelope signals 5939 and 5941 (or 5943 and 5945), in response to phase feedback information from the analog core. The amplitude and phase feedback mechanism is further discussed below. Optionally, upper band path vector modulators 5922 and 5924 also receive a 3G HI Band/Normaln signal 5788 from the digital control module. Signal 5788 can be used, if necessary, to further support driving the vector modulators at the highest frequencies of the upper band.
The output stage of VPA analog core 5900 includes a plurality of MISO amplifiers 5930 and 5932, divided between the upper band path 5964 and the lower band path 5966 of the analog core 5900. Based on the selected band of operation, either the upper band path MISO amplifier 5930 or the lower band path MISO amplifier 5932 is active.
In an embodiment, MISO amplifier 5930 (or 5932) receives substantially constant envelope signals 5939 and 5941 (or 5943 and 5945) from vector modulators 5922 and 5924 (or 5926 and 5928). MISO amplifier 5930 (or 5932) individually amplifies signals 5939 and 5941 (or 5943 and 5945) to generate amplified signals, and combines the amplified signals to generate output signal 5947 (or 5949). In an embodiment, MISO amplifier 5930 (or 5932) combines the amplified signals via direct coupling, as described herein. Other modes of combining the amplified signals according to embodiments of the present invention have been described above in Section 3.
The output stage of VPA analog core 5900 is capable of supporting multi-band multi-mode VPA operation. As shown in FIG. 59, the output stage includes two MISO amplifiers 5930 and 5932 for upper band and lower band operation, respectively. In addition, the output of each of the upper band 5964 and the lower band 5966 is further switched between one or more output paths according to the selected transmission mode (e.g., GSM, WCDMA, etc.). Typically, separate output paths are needed for different transmission modes since FDD-based modes (e.g., WCDMA) require the presence of duplexers at the output, while TDD-based modes (e.g., GSM, EDGE) have T/R switched outputs.
In analog core 5900, the output 5947 of MISO amplifier 5930 can be coupled to one of three output paths 5954, 5956, and 5958, with each output path 5954, 5956, 5958 being the one that is coupled to an antenna (not shown) or connector (not shown) for a particular mode of transmission. Similarly, the output 5949 of MISO amplifier 5932 can be coupled to one of two output paths 5960 and 5962. In an embodiment, output select signals 5776, 5778, 5780, 5782, and 5784, provided by the digital control module, control switches 5942 and 5944 to couple the output of the active MISO amplifier to the appropriate output path, based on the selected transmission mode. It is noted that more or less output paths 5954, 5956, 5958, 5960, and 5962 may be used.
Accordingly, with only two MISO amplifiers 5930 and 5932, analog core 5900 supports multiple different transmission modes. In an embodiment, analog core 5900 allows for using a single MISO amplifier to support GSM, EDGE, WCDMA, and CDMA2000. It is clear therefore that one of the advantages of this exemplary VPA analog core according to implementation 5900 is in the reduction in the number of PAs per supported output paths This directly corresponds to a reduction in required chip area for the VPA analog core 5900.
In an embodiment, the output stage of analog core 5900 receives optional output stage autobias signal 5761, driver stage autobias signal 5763, and gain balance control signal 5749 from the digital control module. Output stage autobias signal 5761 and driver stage autobias signal 5763 may or may not be needed according to the particular type of transistors used in the actual MISO implementation. In an embodiment, output stage autobias signal 5761 and driver stage autobias signal 5763 control the bias of MISO amplification stages to cause a change in the power output and/or the power efficiency of the VPA. Similarly, gain balance control signal 5749 may cause a change in the gain levels of different MISO amplification stages, in response to power output feedback information received by the digital control module from the analog core. Further discussion of these optional output stage input signals will be provided below.
In an embodiment, the output stage of analog core 5900 provides optional feedback signals to the digital control module 5700 of the VPA. Typically, these feedback signals are used by the digital control module 5700 to correct for amplitude and phase variations in branches of the VPA and/or for controlling the output power of the VPA. In the specific implementation of analog core 5900, a differential feedback approach is employed to monitor for amplitude and phase variations, using a differential branch amplitude signal 5950 and a differential branch phase signal 5948 provided by the output stage. Further, output power monitoring is provided using signals PWR Detect A 5938 and PWR Detect B 5940, which measure the output power of MISO amplifiers 5930 and 5932, respectively. Since only one of MISO amplifiers 5930 and 5932 can be active at any time, in an embodiment, PWR Detect A 5938 and PWR Detect 5940 are summed together using summer 5942, to generate a signal that corresponds to the output power of the VPA.
In an embodiment, the feedback signals from the output stage are multiplexed using an input selector 5946 controlled by the digital control module 5700. In another embodiment, the digital control module 5700 uses A/D Input Selector signals 5738, 5740, 5742, 5744, and 5746 to control input selector 5946 and select the feedback signal to be received. It is noted that monitoring of feedback signals may not need to occur in real-time rate and may only need to be performed periodically at a low rate. For example, for the purpose of branch amplitude and phase error correction, the rate at which feedback monitoring is performed depends on several factors such as the degree of feedforward correction being performed in the digital control module, process variations due to temperature, or operation changes such as changing battery or supply voltages.
Above, the tradeoffs between feedforward and feedback error compensation and/or correction techniques have been described. Accordingly, parameters governing the rates at which feedback monitoring is performed are design choices typically selected by the actual designer of the VPA. As a result, analog core implementation 5900 can be programmed to operate as a pure feedback implementation by disabling any feedforward correction in the digital control module, a pure feedforward implementation by disabling the monitoring of feedback signals, or as a hybrid feedforward/feedback implementation with variable feedforward/feedback utilization.
In an embodiment, the output stage of analog core 5900 includes optional output stage protection circuitry. In FIG. 59, this is illustrated using VSWR (Voltage-Standing-Wave-Ratio) Protect circuitry 5934 and 5936 coupled respectively to MISO amplifiers 5930 and 5932. VSWR protection circuitry 5934, 5936 may or may not be needed depending on the actual MISO amplifier implementation. In an embodiment, VSWR Protect circuitry 5934 and 5936 protect the output stage PAs (see PAs 6030 and 6032 in FIG. 60, for example) from going into thermal shutdown or device breakdown, when the output voltage level could cause the output stage breakdown voltage to be exceeded. In conventional systems, this is achieved by using an RF isolator at the output of the PAs, which is both expensive and lossy (typically causes around 1.5 dB in power loss). Accordingly, VSWR Protect circuitry 5934, 5936 eliminate the need for isolators at the output stage, further reducing the cost, size, and power loss of the VPA. In an embodiment, VSWR Protect circuitry 5934, 5936 enable an isolator-free output stage capable of supporting WCDMA. VSWR protection circuitry 5934 and 5936 also enable the VPA to operate into any VSWR level without damaging the VPA. VSWR protection circuitry can be designed to deliver the maximum output power of a particular implementation of a VPA into any VSWR level.
As described above, analog core 5900 includes power supply circuitry for controlling and delivering power to the different stages of the analog core 5900. In one aspect, the power supply circuitry provides means for powering up active portions of the VPA analog core 5900. In another aspect, the power supply circuitry provides means for controlling the power efficiency and/or the output power of the VPA.
In analog core implementation 5900, the power supply circuitry includes MA Power Supply 5902, Driver Stage Power Supply 5904, Output Stage Power Supply 5906, and Vector Mods Power Supply 5908. In an embodiment, the power supply circuitry is controlled by output select signals 5776, 5778, 5780, 5782, and 5784, provided by the digital control module 5700.
MA Power Supply 5902 includes circuitry for controlling the powering up of active portions of the VPA analog core 5900. In analog core 5900, MA Power Supply 5902 has two outputs MA1 VSUPPLY 5903 and MA2 VSUPPLY 5905. At any time, only one of MA1 VSUPPLY 5903 or MA2 VSUPPLY 5905 is active, ensuring that only the upper band 5964 or the lower band 5966 portion of the VPA analog core 5900 is powered up. In an embodiment, the active output of MA Power Supply 5902 is coupled to all active circuitry of the VPA analog core 5900, with the exception of circuitry having unique power supply signals as described below. MA Power Supply 5902 receives output select signals from the digital control module, which enable one or the other of output signals MA1 VSUPPLY 5903 or MA2 VSUPPLY 5905, based on the selected output of the VPA.
Driver Stage Power Supply 5904 includes circuitry for providing power to the driver stage circuitry of the MISO amplifiers 5930, 5932. Similar to MA Power Supply 5902, Driver Stage Power Supply 5904 has two outputs MA1 Driver VSUPPLY 5907 and MA2 Driver VSUPPLY 5909, with only one of the two outputs being active at any time. Driver Stage Power Supply 5904 is also controlled by output select signals 5776, 5778, 5780, 5782, and 5784 according to the selected output of the VPA. In addition, Driver Stage Power Supply 5904 receives a Driver Stage Voltage Control signal 5767 from the digital control module 5700. In an embodiment, the outputs MA1 Driver VSUPPLY 5907 and MA2 Driver VSUPPLY 5909 are generated according to the received Driver Stage Voltage Control signal 5767. In another embodiment, Driver Stage Voltage Control signal 5767 causes Driver Stage Power Supply 5904 to increase or decrease MA1 Driver VSUPPLY 5907 or MA2 Driver VSUPPLY 5909 to control the driver stage power amplification level. In another embodiment, Driver Stage Voltage Control signal 5767 is used by the digital control module 5700 to affect a change, using Driver Stage Power Supply 5904, in the power supply voltage of the driver stage of the active MISO amplifier 5930 or 5932, thereby controlling the power efficiency of the VPA.
Output Stage Power Supply 5906 includes circuitry for providing power to the PA stage circuitry of the MISO amplifiers 5930, 5932. Similar to MA Power Supply 5902, Output Stage Power Supply 5906 has two outputs MA1 Output Stage VSUPPLY 5911 and MA2 Output Stage VSUPPLY 5913, with only one of the two outputs being active at any time. Output Stage Power Supply 5906 is also controlled by output select signals 5776, 5778, 5780, 5782, and 5784 according to the selected output of the VPA. In addition, Output Stage Power Supply 5906 receives an Output Stage Voltage Control signal 5765 from the digital control module 5700. In an embodiment, the outputs MA1 Output Stage VSUPPLY 5911 and MA2 Output Stage VSUPPLY 5913 are generated according to the received Output Stage Voltage Control signal 5765. In another embodiment, Output Stage Voltage Control signal 5765 causes Output Stage Power Supply 5906 to increase or decrease MA1 Output Stage VSUPPLY 5911 or MA2 Output Stage VSUPPLY 5913 to control the PA stage power amplification level. In another embodiment, Output Stage Voltage Control signal 5765 is used by the digital control module 5700 to affect a change, using Output Stage Power Supply 5906, in the power supply voltage of the PA stage of the active MISO amplifier 5930 or 5932, thereby controlling the power efficiency of the VPA.
Vector Mods Power Supply 5908 includes circuitry for providing power to the vector modulators 5922, 5924, 5926, and 5928 of the analog core 5900. In analog core 5900, Vector Mods Power Supply 5908 has two outputs 5915 and 5917 for powering up the upper band vector modulators 5922 and 5924 and the lower band vector modulators 5926 and 5928, respectively. At any time, only one of outputs 5915 or 5917 is active, ensuring that only the upper band or the lower vector modulators of the analog core 5900 are powered up. Vector Mods Power Supply 5908 receives a vector mod select signal 5786 from the digital control module 5700, which controls which of its two outputs 5915 and 5917 is active, according to the selected transmission frequency requirements.
In addition to the above described power supply circuitry, analog core 5900 may optionally include voltage reference generator circuitry. The voltage reference generator circuitry may reside externally or within the VPA analog core 5900. The voltage reference generator circuitry generates reference voltages for different circuits within the VPA. In an embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 57, the voltage reference generator circuitry provides reference voltages to DACs 01-10, coupled to data outputs of the digital control module. In another embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 59, the voltage reference generator circuitry provides reference voltages to the interpolation filters and/or the vector modulators in the VPA analog core. In an embodiment, circuits of the same branch of the VPA are provided with the same reference voltage. For example, note that DACs 01 and 02, interpolation filters 5910 and 5912, and vector modulators 5922 and 5924, which represent a VPA branch or data path, all share the same reference voltage VREF_C 5741. For different implementations and system performance requirements, the voltage reference signals can be provided as a single reference voltage or multiple reference voltages.
FIG. 60 illustrates an output stage embodiment 6000 according to VPA analog core implementation 5900. Output stage embodiment 6000 includes a MISO amplifier stage 6058, an optional output switching stage (embodied by switch 6044), and optional output stage protection and power detection circuitry.
In an embodiment, MISO amplifier stage 6058 corresponds to MISO amplifier 5930 in analog core 5900. Accordingly, MA VSUPPLY signal 6006, MA Driver VSUPPLY signal 6004, and MA Output Stage VSUPPLY signal 6002 correspond respectively to signals 5903, 5907, and 5911 in FIG. 59. Similarly, MA IN1 and MA IN2 input signals 6008 and 6010 and MA Output signals 6046, 6048, and 6050 correspond respectively to MISO input signals 5939 and 5941 and output signals 5954, 5956, and 5958 in FIG. 59. PWR Detect signal 6023 corresponds to PWR Detect A signal 5938 in FIG. 59. (Generally, implementation of MISO amplifier 5932 could also be based on MISO amplifier stage 6058 in FIG. 60.)
MISO amplifier stage 6058 in embodiment 6000 includes a pre-driver amplification stage, embodied by Pre-Drivers 6012 and 6014, a driver amplification stage, embodied by Drivers 6018 and 6020, and a PA amplification stage, embodied by output stage PAs 6030 and 6032. In an embodiment, substantially constant envelope input signals MA IN1 6008 and MA IN2 6010 are amplified at each stage of MISO amplifier 6058, before being summed at the outputs of the PA stage.
In an embodiment, MISO amplifier stage 6058 is powered by power supply signals provided by voltage controlled power supply circuits. As described with reference to FIG. 59, the power supply signals are generated by power supply circuitry of the VPA analog core 5900. In an embodiment, the power supply signals are used to control the power supply voltages of the different amplification stages of MISO amplifier stage 6058, thereby affecting the power efficiency of the VPA under various operating conditions. In another embodiment, the power supply signals are used to control the gain of each of the different amplification stages of MISO amplifier stage 6058, thereby enabling a power control mechanism. Further, the power supply signals can be controlled independently of each other, allowing for independent control of power and/or efficiency for each of the different amplification stages of MISO amplifier stage 6058. This independent control allows, for example, for shutting off one or more amplification stages of MISO amplifier 6058 according to the desired output power of the VPA. In FIG. 60, the power supply signals are illustrated using signals 6002, 6004, and 6006.
In an embodiment, MISO amplifier stage 6058 includes bias control circuitry. The bias control circuitry may be optional according to the particular MISO amplifier implementation. In an embodiment, the bias control circuitry provides a mechanism for controlling efficiency and/or power at each amplification stage of MISO amplifier 6058. This mechanism is independent of the mechanism described above with reference to the power supply signals. Further, this mechanism provides for independently and individually controlling each amplification stage. In FIG. 60, the bias control circuitry is illustrated using Gain Balance Control Circuitry 6016, Driver Stage Autobias Circuitry 6022, and Output Stage Autobias Circuitry 6028.
In an embodiment, Gain Balance Control Circuitry 6016 is coupled to the inputs of the pre-driver amplification stage as illustrated in FIG. 60. Gain Balance Control Circuitry 6016 receives a Gain Balance Control signal 5749 from the digital control module 5700 (through a DAC), and outputs input bias control signals 6013 and 6015. Driver Stage Autobias Circuitry 6022 is coupled to the inputs of the driver amplification stage as illustrated in FIG. 60. Driver Stage Autobias Circuitry 6022 receives Driver Stage Autobias signal 5763 from the digital control module 5700 (through a DAC), and outputs input bias control signals 6017 and 6019. Similarly, Output Stage Autobias Circuitry 6028 is coupled to the inputs of the PA amplification stage as illustrated in FIG. 60. Output Stage Autobias Circuitry 6028 receives Output Stage Autobias signal 5761 from the digital control module 5700 (through a DAC), and outputs input bias control signals 6029 and 6031.
In an embodiment, the digital control module 5700 independently controls the bias of the pre-driver stage, the driver stage, and the PA stage of MISO amplifier 6058 using Gain Balance Control signal 5749, Driver Stage Autobias signal 5763, and Output Stage Autobias signal 5761, respectively. In another embodiment, the digital control module 5700 may affect a change in the bias of the pre-driver stage, the driver stage, and/or the PA stage of MISO amplifier 6058 only using Gain Balance Control signal 5749. As illustrated in FIG. 60, Gain Balance Control Circuitry 6016 is coupled to Driver Stage Autobias Circuitry 6022 and Output Stage Autobias Circuitry 6028. In an embodiment, a change in the overall gain of the VPA is affected by digital control module 5700 first by controlling the bias at the pre-driver stage. If further gain change is needed, bias control is performed at the driver stage, and subsequently at the PA stage.
In an embodiment, MISO amplifier stage 6058 includes circuits for enabling an error correction and/or compensation feedback mechanism. In output stage embodiment 6000, a differential feedback mechanism is adopted, whereby Differential Branch Amplitude Measurement Circuitry 6024 and Differential Branch Phase Measurement Circuitry 6026 respectively measure differences in amplitude and phase between branches of MISO amplifier 6058. In an embodiment, Differential Branch Amplitude Measurement Circuitry 6024 and Differential Branch Phase Measurement Circuitry 6026 are coupled at the inputs of the PA stage (PAs 6030 and 6032) of MISO amplifier 6058. In other embodiments, circuitry 6024 and 6026 may be coupled at the inputs of prior stages of MISO amplifier 6058. In an embodiment, Differential Branch Amplitude Measurement Circuitry 6024 and Differential Branch Phase Measurement Circuitry 6026 respectively output Differential Branch Amplitude signal 5950 and Differential Branch Phase signal 5948, which are fed back to digital control module 5700 (through A/D converters). Since digital control module 5700 knows at any particular time the correct differences in amplitude and/or phase between the branches of MISO amplifier 6058, it may determine any errors in amplitude and/or phase based on Differential Branch Amplitude signal 5950 and Differential Branch Phase signal 5948.
Output stage embodiment 6000 includes optional output stage protection circuitry. The output stage protection circuitry may or may not be needed according to the particular MISO amplifier implementation. In FIG. 60, the output stage protection circuitry is illustrated using VSWR Protection Circuitry 6034. In an embodiment, VSWR Protection Circuitry 6034 monitors the output of the PA stage, and controls the gain of MISO amplifier 6058 to protect PAs 6030 and 6032. In embodiment 6000, VSWR Protection Circuitry 6034 receives a signal 6036, which is coupled either directly or indirectly to the output of the PA stage. In an embodiment, VSWR Protection Circuitry 6034 ensures that the voltage level at the output of the PA stage remains below a certain level, to prevent PAs 6030 and 6032 from going into thermal shutdown or experiencing device breakdown. In an embodiment, VSWR Protection Circuitry 6034 ensures that a breakdown voltage of PAs 6030 and 6032 is not exceeded. Accordingly, whenever the voltage level at the output of PAs 6030 and 6032 is above a pre-determined threshold, VSWR Protection Circuitry 6034 may cause a decrease in the gain of the MISO amplification stages. In an embodiment, VSWR Protection Circuitry 6034 is coupled to Balance Gain Control Circuitry 6016, which in turn is coupled to both Driver Stage Autobias Circuitry 6022 and Output Stage Autobias Circuitry 6028. In an embodiment, VSWR Protection Circuitry 6034 responds to a pre-determined voltage level at the output stage PAs by decreasing gain first at the pre-driver stage, then at the driver stage, and finally at the PA stage. As described above, VSWR Protection Circuitry 6034 may or may not be needed according to the particular MISO amplifier implementation. For example, a GaAs (Gallium Arsenide) MISO amplifier implementation would not require VSWR Protection Circuitry, as typical breakdown voltages of GaAs transistors are too large to be exceeded in many RF scenarios.
Output stage embodiment 6000 includes optional power detection circuitry. In an embodiment, the power detection circuitry serves as a means for providing power level feedback to the digital control module. In FIG. 60, the power detection circuitry is illustrated using Power Detection Circuitry 6038. In an embodiment, Power Detection Circuitry 6038 is coupled to the output of the PA stage of MISO amplifier 6058. Power Detection Circuitry 6038 may be coupled directly or indirectly to the output of the PA stage as illustrated by signal 6040 in FIG. 60. In an embodiment, Power Detection Circuitry 6038 outputs a PWR Detect signal 6023. PWR Detect signal 6023 may be equivalent to PWR Detect A signal 5938 or PWR Detect B signal 5940 shown in FIG. 59, which are fed back (through A/D converters) into the digital control module of the VPA. The digital control module uses PWR Detect signal 6023 to regulate the output power of the VPA as desired.
The optional output switching stage of output stage embodiment 6000 is embodied by a switch 6044 in FIG. 60. In an embodiment, switch 6044 is coupled to one of three outputs 6046, 6048, or 6050 of the VPA. As described earlier, the switch is controlled by a set of output select signals 5776, 5778, and 5780, provided by the digital control module. Switch 6044 is coupled to the proper output according to the select transmission mode and/or desired output frequency requirements (e.g., GSM, WCDMA, etc.).
Accordingly, pull-up impedance coupling at the output of the VPA can be done in various ways. In an embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, pull-up impedances 6052, 6054, and 6056 are respectively coupled between outputs 6046, 6048, and 6050 and MA Output Stage VSUPPLY 6002. In another embodiment, a single pull-up impedance is used and is coupled between the output 6042 of the PA stage and MA Output Stage VSUPPLY 6002. The advantage of the first approach lies in that, by placing the pull-impedance after the switch 6044, the impedance characteristics of switch 6044 can be taken into account when selecting values for impedances 6052, 6054, and/or 6056, allowing the VPA designer to exploit a further aspect to increase the efficiency of the VPA. On the other hand, the second approach requires a smaller number of pull-up impedances.
According to the particular MISO amplifier implementation, output stage embodiment 6000 may include more or less circuitry than to what is illustrated in FIG. 60.
According to embodiments of the present invention, output stage embodiment 6000 including MISO amplifier stage 6058, the optional output switching stage (switch 6044), and the optional output protection and power detection circuitry may be fabricated using a SiGe (Silicon-Germanium) material. In another embodiment, MISO amplifier stage 6058 is fabricated using SiGe, and the output switching stage is fabricated using GaAs. In another embodiment, the PA stage (PAs 6030 and 6032) and the output switching stage are fabricated using GaAs, while other circuitry of MISO amplifier stage 6058 and optional circuitry of the output stage are fabricated using SiGe. In another embodiment, the PA stage, the driver stage, and the output switching stage are fabricated using GaAs, while other circuitry of MISO amplifier stage 6058 and optional circuitry of the output stage are fabricated using SiGe. In another embodiment, the PA stage, the driver stage, the pre-driver stage, and the output switching stage are fabricated using GaAs. In another embodiment, the VPA system may be implemented using CMOS for all circuitry except for the output stage (6030 or 6032) which could be implemented in SiGe or GaAs material. In another embodiment, the VPA system may be implemented in its entirety in CMOS. Other variations and/or combinations of fabrication material(s) used for circuitry of the output stage are also possible, as can be understood by a person skilled in the art, and are therefore also within the scope of embodiments of the present invention.
Accordingly, as different semiconductor materials have different costs and performance, embodiments of the present invention provide a variety of VPA designs encompassing a wide range of cost and performance options.
4.3.2) VPA Analog Core Implementation B
FIG. 61 illustrates an alternative VPA analog core implementation 6100 according to an embodiment of the present invention. For illustrative purposes, the VPA analog core 6100 is shown in FIG. 61 as being connected to digital control module 5700, although alternatively other digital control modules could be used. The physical connection between analog core 6100 and digital control module implementation 5700 is illustrated in FIG. 61, as indicated by the same numeral signals on both FIG. 57 and FIG. 61.
Analog core implementation 6100 is corresponds to a 2-Branch VPA embodiment. This implementation, however, can be readily modified to a 4-Branch or a CPCP VPA embodiment, as will be apparent to persons skilled in the art based on the teachings herein.
Analog core implementation 6100 has the same input stage and vector modulation stage as analog core implementation 5900, described above. Accordingly, similar to analog core implementation 5900, analog core 6100 includes an upper band path 5964 and a lower band path 5966 for upper band and lower band operation of the VPA, respectively.
One of the differences between analog core 5900 and analog core 6100 lies in the output stage of the VPA. In contrast to the output stage of analog core 5900, which includes two MISO amplifiers 5930 and 5932, the output stage of analog core 6100 includes five MISO amplifiers 6126, 6128, 6130, 6132, and 6134, divided between the upper band path 5964 and the lower band path 5966 of the analog core. In an embodiment, the output stage includes a combination of SiGe and GaAs MISO amplifiers. In an embodiment, the upper band path 5964 includes three MISO amplifiers 6126, 6128, and 6130, and the lower band path 5966 includes two MISO amplifiers 6132 and 6134. Based on the selected band of operation, a single MISO amplifier, either in the upper band path 5964 or the lower band path 5966, is active. In an embodiment, each of MISO amplifiers 6126, 6128, 6130, 6132, and 6134 can be dedicated to a single transmission mode (e.g., WCDMA, GSM, EDGE, etc.) of the VPA. This is in contrast to analog core 5900, where each of MISO amplifiers 5930 and 5932 supports more than one transmission modes. Advantages and disadvantages of each architecture will be further discussed below.
As a result of having more than one MISO amplifiers per path, a switching stage is needed to couple the vector modulation stage to the MISO amplifiers in analog core 6100. In FIG. 61, this is illustrated using switches 6118, 6120, 6122, and 6124. In an embodiment, according to the selected transmission mode, switches 6118 and 6120 couple the outputs 5939 and 5941 of vector modulators 5922 and 5924 to one of MISO amplifiers 6126, 6128, and 6130. Similarly, switches 6122 and 6124 couples the outputs 5943 and 5945 to one of MISO amplifiers 6132 and 6134, according to the selected transmission mode and/or frequency requirements.
In an embodiment, MISO amplifier 6126 (or 6128, 6130, 6132, 6134) receives constant envelope signals 6119 and 6121 (or 6123 and 6125, 6127 and 6129, 6131 and 6133, 6135 and 61137). MISO amplifier 6126 (or 6128, 6130, 6132, 6134) individually amplifies signals 6119 and 6121 (or 6123 and 6125, 6127 and 6129, 6131 and 6133, 6135 and 6137) to generate amplified signals, and combines the amplified signals to generate output signal 6141 (6144, 6146, 6148, 6150). In an embodiment, MISO amplifier 6126 (or 6128, 6130, 6132, 6134) combines the amplified signals via direct coupling, as described herein. Other modes of combining the amplified signals according to embodiments of the present invention have been described above in Section 3.
The output stage of VPA analog core 6100 is capable of supporting multi-band multi-mode VPA operation. Further, since the output stage of analog core 6100 can dedicate one MISO amplifier for each supported transmission mode, the output switching stage (embodied in analog core 5900 by switches 5942 and 5944) can be eliminated. This results in a more efficient output stage (no power loss due switching stage), but at the expense of a larger chip area. This summarizes the main tradeoff between the architecture of analog core 5900 and that of analog core 6100.
In an embodiment, the output stage of analog core 6100 receives optional bias control signals from digital control module 5700. These are output stage autobias signal 5761, driver stage autobias signal 5763, and gain balance control signal 5749, which have been described above with reference to analog core 5900.
In an embodiment, the output stage of analog core 6100 provides optional feedback signals to digital control module 5700 of the VPA. These feedback signals include Differential Branch Amplitude signal 5950 and Differential Branch Phase signal 5948, described above with reference to analog core 5900, to enable a differential feedback approach to monitor for amplitude and phase variations in branches of the VPA. Also, similar to analog core 5900, output power monitoring is provided using PWR Detect signals 6152, 6154, 6156, 6158, and 6160, each of which measuring one of outputs 6142, 6144, 6146, 6148, and 6150 of the VPA. Since only one of the VPA outputs can be active at any time, PWR Detect signals 6152, 6154, 6156, 6158, and 6160 are summed together, in an embodiment, using summer 5952, to generate a signal that corresponds to the current output power of the VPA.
Similar to analog core 5900, the feedback signals from the output stage are multiplexed using an input selector 5946 controlled by the digital control module. Other aspects of the multiplexing of the feedback signals are described above with reference to analog core 5900.
Similar to analog core 5900, analog core 6100 can be designed to operate as a pure feedback implementation by disabling any feedforward correction in the digital control module, a pure feedforward implementation by disabling the monitoring of feedback signals, or as a hybrid feedforward/feedback implementation with variable feedforward/feedback utilization.
In an embodiment, the output stage of analog core 6100 includes optional output stage protection circuitry. In FIG. 61, this is illustrated using VSWR (Voltage-Standing-Wave-Ratio) Protect circuitry 6136, 6138, and 6140 coupled respectively to MISO amplifiers 6128, 6130, and 6134. VSWR protection circuitry may or may not be needed depending on the actual MISO amplifier implementation. For example, note that MISO amplifiers 6126 and 6132, which are GaAs amplifiers, require no VSWR protection circuitry for many applications. Functions and advantages of VSWR Protection circuitry according to embodiments of the present invention are described above with reference to analog core 5900.
Analog core 6100 includes power supply circuitry for controlling and delivering power to the different stages of the analog core. In one aspect, the power supply circuitry provides means for powering up active portions of the VPA analog core. In another aspect, the power supply circuitry provides means for controlling the power efficiency and/or the output power of the VPA.
The power supply circuitry of analog core 6100 is substantially similar to the power supply circuitry of analog core 5900, with the difference being that analog core 6100 includes five MISO amplifiers as opposed to two in analog core 5900. In FIG. 61, the power supply circuitry is embodied in GMA and MA Power Supply circuitry 6102, Driver Stage Power Supply circuitry 5904, Output Stage Power Supply circuitry 5908, and Vector Mods Power Supply circuitry 5908. Each of circuitry 6102, 5904, and 5906 has five output power supply signals, with a single one of these five output signals being active at any time, according to the active MISO amplifier of the VPA. Function and operation of the power supply circuitry of analog core 6100 are substantially similar to those of the power supply circuitry of analog core 5900, described above.
FIG. 62 illustrates an output stage embodiment 6200 according to VPA analog core implementation 6100. Output stage embodiment 6200 includes a MISO amplifier stage 6220 and optional output stage protection and power detection circuitry.
MISO amplifiers 6126, 6128, 6130, 6132 and/or 6134 shown in FIG. 61 can be implemented using an amplifier such as MISO amplifier stage 6220.
Output stage embodiment 6200 is substantially similar to output stage embodiment 6000 illustrated in FIG. 60, with the main difference being in the elimination of the output switching stage (embodied by switch 6044 in FIG. 60) in embodiment 6200.
Similar to embodiment 6000, MISO amplifier stage 6220 in embodiment 6200 includes a pre-driver amplification stage, embodied by Pre-Drivers 6206 and 6208, a driver amplification stage, embodied by Drivers 6210 and 6212, and a PA amplification stage, embodied by output stage PAs 6214 and 6216. In an embodiment, substantially constant envelope input signals MA IN1 6202 and MA IN 6204 are amplified at each stage of MISO amplifier 6220, before being summed at the outputs of the PA stage. Input signals MA IN1 6202 and MA IN 6204 correspond to signals 6123 and 6125 in FIG. 61, for example.
In an embodiment, MISO amplifier stage 6220 of output stage embodiment 6200 is powered by power supply signals provided by voltage controlled power supply circuits. In another embodiment, MISO amplifier stage 6220 includes optional bias control circuitry controllable by the digital control module. In another embodiment, MISO amplifier stage 6220 includes circuits for enabling an error correction and/or compensation feedback mechanism. In another embodiment, output stage embodiment 6000 includes optional output stage protection circuitry and power detection circuitry. These aspects (power supply, bias control, error correction, output protection, and power detection) of output stage embodiment 6200 are substantially similar to what have been described above with respect to output stage embodiment 6000.
According to embodiments of the present invention, output stage embodiment 6200 may be fabricated using a SiGe (Silicon-Germanium) material including MISO amplifier stage 6220 and the optional output protection and power detection circuitry. In another embodiment, MISO amplifier stage 6220 is fabricated using SiGe in its entirety. In another embodiment, the PA stage (PAs 6214 and 6216) of MISO amplifier stage 6220 is fabricated using GaAs, while other circuitry of MISO amplifier stage 6220 and optional circuitry of the output stage are fabricated using SiGe. In another embodiment, the PA stage and the driver stage (Drivers 6210 and 6212) of MISO amplifier stage 6220 are fabricated using GaAs, while other circuitry of MISO amplifier stage 6220 and optional circuitry of the output stage are fabricated using SiGe. In another embodiment, the PA stage, the driver stage, and the pre-driver stage (Pre-Drivers 6206 and 6208) are fabricated using GaAs. In another embodiment, the VPA system may be implemented using CMOS for all circuitry except for the output stage (6030 or 6032) which could be implemented in SiGe or GaAs material. In another embodiment, the VPA system may be implemented in its entirety in CMOS. Other variations and/or combinations of fabrication material(s) used for circuitry of the output stage are also possible, as can be understood by a person skilled in the art, and are therefore also within the scope of embodiments of the present invention. Further, output stages within the same the VPA may be fabricated using different material, as illustrated in FIG. 61 for example, where MISO amplifiers 6128, 6130, and 6134 are SiGe amplifiers and MISO amplifiers 6126 and 6132 are GaAs amplifiers (one or more stages of their output stage are GaAs).
4.3.3) VPA Analog Core Implementation C
FIG. 63 illustrates another VPA analog core implementation 6300 according to an embodiment of the present invention. For illustrative purposes, example analog core 6300 is shown in FIG. 63 as being connected to digital control module 5800, although other digital control modules could alternatively be used. The physical connection between analog core 6300 and digital control module 5800 is indicated by the same numeral signals on both FIG. 58 and FIG. 63.
Analog core implementation 6300 corresponds to a 2-Branch VPA embodiment. This implementation, however, can be readily modified to a 4-Branch or a CPCP VPA embodiment, as will be apparent to a person skilled in the art based on the teachings herein.
Analog core implementation 6300 includes similar input stage, vector modulation stage, and amplification output stage as analog core 5900 of FIG. 59. Function, operation and control of these stages is described above with reference to FIG. 59.
Similar to analog core 5900, analog core 6300 includes a feedback error correction and/or compensation mechanism. In contrast to analog core 5900, however, analog core 6300 employs a receiver-based feedback mechanism, as opposed to a differential feedback mechanism in analog core 5900. A receiver-based feedback mechanism is one that is based on having a receiver that receives the active output of the VPA, generates I data and Q data from the received output, and feeds back the generated I and Q data to the digital control module. By estimating the delay between the input and the output of the VPA, the feedback I and Q signals can be properly aligned with their corresponding input I and Q signals. In another embodiment, the receiver feedback includes the complex output signal (magnitude and phase polar information) instead of Cartesian I and Q data signals.
In an embodiment, this is done by coupling a receiver (not shown) at the active output of the VPA (5947 or 5949). In FIG. 63, signals 6302 and 6304 respectively represent upper band and lower band RF inputs into the receiver. Only one of signals 6302 and 6304 can be active at any time, depending on whether the upper band path 5964 or the lower band path 5966 of analog core 6300 is being used. Similarly, the receiver-based feedback mechanism includes an upper band path and a lower band path. In an embodiment, each of the upper band and lower band feedback paths include an Automatic Gain Controller (AGC) (6306 and 6308), I/Q sample-and-hold (S/H) circuitry (6314, 6316 and 6318, 6320), switching circuitry (6322 and 6324), and optional interpolation filters (6326 and 6328). In an embodiment, a switch 6330, controlled by the digital control module by means of input select signals 5810 and 5812, couples either the upper band or the lower band feedback paths to the digital control module. Further, based on the coupled feedback path, digital control module I/Qn Select signal 5808 controls switching circuitry 6322 or 6324 to alternate the coupling of I data and Q data to the digital control module. Other implementations are also possible as can be understood by a person skilled in the art based on the teachings herein.
In an embodiment, the AGC circuitry is used to allow the receiver to feedback useful I and Q information over a wide dynamic range of VPA output power. For example, output signals 5954, 5956, 5958, 5960, and 5962 can vary from +35 dBm to −60 dBm in certain cell phone applications. For I and Q data to contain accurate feedback information, the I and Q output of the receiver needs to be scaled to utilize the majority of the input voltage range of the A/Din signal 5736, independently of the output signal power. Digital Control module 5800 is designed to control the VPA to the required output power, which allows digital control module 5800 to determine an appropriate receiver gain to achieve the proper A/D input voltage which is digitized through A/D 5732.
A VPA analog core with a receiver-based feedback mechanism can be implemented as a pure feedback, feedforward, or hybrid feedback/feedforward system. As described above, a pure feedback implementation requires a minimal amount of or no memory (RAM 5608, NVRAM 5610) in the digital control module. This may represent one advantage of an analog core implementation according to analog core 6300, in addition to the elimination of differential feedback measurement circuitry from the analog core. Nonetheless, analog core 6300 can be programmed to operate as a pure feedback implementation by disabling any feedforward correction in digital control module 5800, a pure feedforward implementation by disabling the monitoring of feedback signals, or as a hybrid feedforward/feedback implementation with variable feedforward/feedback utilization.
In an embodiment, the output stage of analog core 6300 includes optional output stage protection circuitry. This is not shown in FIG. 63, but has been described above with respect to analog core implementations 5900 and 6100. Other aspects of analog core 6300 (bias control, power supply, etc.) are substantially similar to analog core 5900, and are described above with reference to FIG. 59.
FIG. 64 illustrates an output stage embodiment 6400 according to VPA analog core implementation 6300. Output stage embodiment 6400 includes a MISO amplifier stage 6434 and an output switching stage. In an embodiment, MISO amplifier stage 6434 corresponds to MISO amplifier 5930 and/or 5932, shown in FIG. 63 (that is, either or both of MISO amplifiers 5930, 5932 can be implemented using an amplifier such as MISO amplifier stage 6434).
Output stage embodiment 6400 is substantially similar to output stage embodiment 6000 illustrated in FIG. 60, with the main difference being in the elimination of the differential branch measurement circuitry (6024 and 6026) due to the use a receiver-based feedback mechanism.
Similar to embodiment 6000, MISO amplifier stage 6434 in embodiment 6400 includes a pre-driver amplification stage, embodied by Pre-Drivers 6406 and 6408, a driver amplification stage, embodied by Drivers 6410 and 6412, and a PA amplification stage, embodied by output stage PAs 6414 and 6416. In an embodiment, constant envelope input signals MA IN1 6402 and MA IN 6404 are amplified at each stage of MISO amplifier stage 6434, before being summed at the outputs of the PA stage of MISO amplifier stage 6434.
In an embodiment, MISO amplifier stage 6434 of output stage embodiment 6400 is powered by power supply signals provided by voltage controlled power supply circuits. In another embodiment, MISO amplifier stage 6434 includes optional bias control circuitry controllable by the digital control module. In another embodiment, output stage embodiment 6400 includes optional output stage protection circuitry (not shown in FIG. 64). These aspects (power supply, bias control, and output protection) of output stage embodiment 6400 are substantially similar to what have been described above with respect to output stage embodiment 6000.
According to embodiments of the present invention, output stage embodiment 6400 may be fabricated using a SiGe (Silicon-Germanium) material including the MISO amplifier stage 6434, the output switching stage 6420, and the optional output protection circuitry. In another embodiment, MISO amplifier stage 6434 is fabricated using SiGe, and the output switching stage 6420 is fabricated using GaAs. In another embodiment, the PA stage (PAs 6414 and 6416) of MISO amplifier stage 6434 and the output switching stage 6420 are fabricated using GaAs, while other circuitry of MISO amplifier stage 6434 and optional circuitry of the output stage are fabricated using SiGe. In another embodiment, the PA stage, the driver stage (Drivers 6410 and 6412), and the output switching stage 6420 are fabricated using GaAs, while other circuitry of MISO amplifier stage 6434 and optional circuitry of the output stage are fabricated using SiGe. In another embodiment, the PA stage, the driver stage, the pre-driver stage (Pre-drivers 6406 and 6408), and the output switching stage 6420 are fabricated using GaAs. In another embodiment, the VPA system may be implemented using CMOS for all circuitry except for the output stage (6030 or 6032) which could be implemented in SiGe or GaAs material. In another embodiment, the VPA system may be implemented in its entirety in CMOS. Other variations and/or combinations of fabrication material(s) used for circuitry of the output stage are also possible, as can be understood by a person skilled in the art, and are therefore also within the scope of embodiments of the present invention. Further, output stages within the same the VPA may be fabricated using different material, as illustrated in FIG. 61 for example, where MISO amplifiers 6128, 6130, and 6134 are SiGe amplifiers and MISO amplifiers 6126 and 6132 are GaAs amplifiers (one or more stages of their output stage are GaAs).
5. Real-Time Amplifier Class Control Of VPA Output Stage
According to embodiments of the present invention, a VPA output stage can be controlled to vary its amplifier class of operation according to changes in its output waveform trajectory. This concept is illustrated in FIG. 65 with reference to an exemplary WCDMA waveform. The graph in FIG. 65 illustrates a timing diagram of a WCDMA output waveform envelope versus the class of operation of the VPA output stage. Note that the output waveform envelope is directly proportional to the output power of the VPA output stage.
It is noted that the VPA output stage amplifier class traverses from a class S amplifier to a class A amplifier as the output waveform envelope decreases from its maximum value towards zero. At the zero crossing, the VPA output stage operates as a class A amplifier, before switching to higher class amplifier operation as the output waveform envelope increases.
One important problem overcome by this real-time ability to control the VPA output stage amplifier class of operation is the phase accuracy control problem. With regard to the example shown in FIG. 65, the phase accuracy control problem lies in the fact that in order to produce high quality waveforms, at any given power level, a 40 dB of output power dynamic range is desirable. However, the phase accuracy required to produce a 40 dB output power dynamic range (around 1.14 degrees or 1.5 picoseconds) is well beyond the tolerance of practical circuits in high volume applications. As will be appreciated, the specific power ranges cited in this paragraph, and elsewhere herein, are provided solely for illustrative purposes, and are not limiting.
Embodiments according to the present invention solve the phase accuracy control problem by transiting multiple classes of operation based on waveform trajectory so as to maintain the best balance of efficiency versus practical control accuracy for all waveforms. In embodiments, the output power dynamic range of the VPA output stage exceeds 90 dB.
In an embodiment, at higher instantaneous signal power levels, the amplifier class in operation (class S) is highly efficient and phase accuracy is easily achieved using phase control. At lower instantaneous signal power levels, however, phase control may not be sufficient to achieve the required waveform linearity. This is illustrated in FIG. 66, which shows a plot of the VPA output power (in dBm) versus the outphasing angle between branches of the VPA. It can be seen that at high power levels, a change in outphasing angle results in a smaller output power change than at lower power levels. Accordingly, phase control provides higher resolution power control at higher power levels than at lower power levels.
Accordingly, to support high resolution power control at lower power levels, other mechanisms of control are needed in addition to phase control. FIG. 67 illustrates exemplary power control mechanisms according to embodiments of the present invention using an exemplary QPSK waveform. The QPSK constellation is imposed on a unit circle in the complex domain defined by cos(wt) and sin(wt). The constellation space is partitioned between three concentric and non-intersecting regions: an outermost “phase control only” region, a central “phase control, bias control, and amplitude control” region, and an innermost “bias control and amplitude control” region. According to embodiments of the present invention, the outermost, central, and innermost regions define the type of power control to be applied according to the power level of the output waveform. For example, referring to FIG. 67, at lower power levels (points falling in the innermost region), bias control and amplitude control are used to provide the required waveform linearity. On the other hand, at higher power levels (points falling in the outermost region), phase control (by controlling the outphasing angle) only is sufficient.
As can be understood by persons skilled in the art, the control regions illustrated in FIG. 67 are provided for purposes of illustration only and are not limiting. Other control regions can be defined according to embodiments of the present invention. Typically, but not exclusively, the boundaries of the control regions are based on the Complementary Cumulative Density Function (CCDF) of the desired output waveform and the sideband performance criteria. Accordingly, the control regions' boundaries change according to the desired output waveform of the VPA.
In embodiments, the power control mechanisms defined by the different control regions enable the transition of the VPA output stage between different class amplifiers. This is shown in FIG. 68, which illustrates, side by side, the output stage amplifier class operation versus the output waveform envelope and the control regions imposed on a unit circle. FIG. 69 further shows the output stage current in response to the output waveform envelope. It is noted that the output stage current closely follows the output waveform envelope. In particular, it is noted that the output stage current goes completely to zero when the output waveform envelope undergoes a zero crossing.
FIG. 70 illustrates the VPA output stage theoretical efficiency versus the output stage current. Note that the output stage current waveform of FIG. 70 corresponds to the one shown in FIG. 69. In an embodiment, the VPA output stage operates at 100% theoretical efficiency for 98% (or greater) of the time. It is also noted from FIG. 70 the transition of the output stage between different amplifier classes of operation according to changes in the output stage current.
FIG. 71 illustrates an exemplary VPA according to an embodiment of the present invention. For illustrative purposes, and not purposes of limitation, the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 71 will be used herein to further describe the various control mechanisms that can be used to cause the transitioning of the VPA output stage (illustrated as a MISO amplifier in FIG. 71) between different amplifier classes of operation.
The VPA embodiment of FIG. 71 includes a transfer function module, a pair of vector modulators controlled by a frequency reference synthesizer, and a MISO amplifier output stage. The transfer function module receives I and Q data and generates amplitude information that is used by the vector modulators to generate substantially constant envelope signals. The substantially constant envelope signals are amplified and summed in a single operation using the MISO amplifier output stage.
According to embodiments of the present invention, the MISO amplifier output stage can be caused to transition in real time between different amplifier classes of operation according to changes in output waveform trajectory. In an embodiment, this is achieved by controlling the phases of the constant envelope signals generated by the vector modulators. In another embodiment, amplitudes of the MISO amplifier input signals are controlled using the transfer function. In another embodiment, the MISO amplifier inputs are biased (biasing of the MISO inputs can be done at any amplification stage within the MISO amplifier) using the transfer function to control the MISO amplifier class of operation. In other embodiments, combinations of these control mechanisms (phase, input bias and/or input amplitude) are used to enable the MISO amplifier stage to transition between different amplifier classes of operation.
FIG. 72 is a process flowchart 100 that illustrates a method for real-time amplifier class control in a power amplifier, according to changes in output waveform trajectory, according to an embodiment of the invention. Process flowchart 100 begins in step 110, which includes determining an instantaneous power level of a desired output waveform. In an embodiment, the instantaneous power level is determined as a function of the desired output waveform envelope.
Based on the determined instantaneous power level, step 120 of process flowchart 100 includes determining a desired amplifier class of operation, wherein said amplifier class of operation optimizes the power efficiency and linearity of the power amplifier. In an embodiment, determining the amplifier class of operation depends on the specific type of desired output waveform (e.g., CDMA, GSM, EDGE).
Step 130 includes controlling the power amplifier to operate according to the determined amplifier class of operation. In an embodiment, the power amplifier is controlled using phase control, bias control, and/or amplitude control methods, as described herein.
According to process flowchart 100, the power amplifier is controlled such that it transitions between different amplifier classes of operation according to the instantaneous power level of the desired output waveform. In other embodiments, the power amplifier is controlled such that it transitions between different amplifier classes of operation according the average output power of the desired output waveform. In further embodiments, the power amplifier is controlled such that it transitions between different amplifier classes of operation according to both the instantaneous power level and the average output power of the desired output waveform.
According to embodiments of the present invention, the power amplifier can be controlled to transition from a class A amplifier to a class S amplifier, while passing through intermediary amplifier classes (AB, B, C, and D).
Embodiments of the invention control transitioning of the power amplifier(s) to different amplifier classes as follows:
To achieve a class A amplifier, the drive level and bias of the power amplifier are controlled so that the output current conduction angle is equal to 360 degrees. The conduction angle is defined as the angular portion of a drive cycle in which output current is flowing through the amplifier.
To achieve a class AB amplifier, the drive level and bias of the power amplifier are controlled so that the output current conduction angle is greater than 180 degrees and less than 360 degrees.
To achieve a class B amplifier, the drive level and bias of the power amplifier are controlled so that the output current conduction angle is approximately equal to 180 degrees.
To achieve a class C amplifier, the drive level and bias of the power amplifier are controlled so that the output current conduction angle is less than 180 degrees.
To achieve a class D amplifier, the drive level and bias of the power amplifier are controlled so that the amplifier is operated in switch mode (on/off).
To achieve a class S amplifier, the amplifier is controlled to generate a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) output signal.
In an embodiment, the above described real-time amplifier class control of the VPA output stage is accompanied by a dynamic change in the transfer function being implemented in the digital control module of the VPA. This is further described below with respect to FIGS. 73-77.
FIG. 73 illustrates an example VPA output stage according to an npn implementation with two branches. Each branch of the VPA output stage receives a respective substantially constant envelope signal. The substantially constant envelope signals are illustrated as IN1 and IN2 in FIG. 73. Transistors of the VPA output stage are coupled together by their emitter nodes to form an output node of the VPA.
When the VPA output stage operates as a class S amplifier, it effectuates Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) on the received substantially constant envelope signals IN1 and IN2. A theoretical equivalent circuit of the VPA output stage in this amplifier class of operation is illustrated in FIG. 74. Note that transistors of the VPA output stage are equivalent to switching amplifiers in this class of operation. The output of the VPA as a function of the outphasing angle θ between the substantially constant envelope signals IN1 and IN2 (assuming that IN1 and IN2 have substantially equal amplitude of value A) is given by




  
    SQ
    ⁡
    
      (
      θ
      )
    
  
  =
  
    A
    ⁢
    
      
        
          π
          -
          θ
        
        
          2
          ⁢
          
            
          
          ⁢
          π
        
      
      .
    
  




A plot of this function, described previously as the magnitude to phase shift transform, is illustrated in FIG. 76.

On the other hand, when the VPA output stage operates as a class A amplifier, it emulates a perfect summing node. A theoretical equivalent circuit of the VPA output stage in this amplifier class of operation is illustrated in FIG. 75. Note that transistors of the VPA output stage are equivalent to current sources in this class of operation. The output of the VPA as function of the outphasing angle θ between the substantially constant envelope signals IN1 and IN2 (assuming that IN1 and IN2 have substantially equal amplitude of value A) is given by R(θ)=AA√{square root over (2(1+cos(θ)))}. A plot of this function, described previously as the magnitude to phase shift transform, is illustrated in FIG. 76.
According to an embodiment of the present invention, amplifier classes of operation A and S represent two extremes of the amplifier operating range of the VPA output stage. However, as described above, the VPA output stage may transition a plurality of other amplifier classes of operation including, for example, classes AB, B, C, and D. Accordingly, the transfer function implemented by the digital control module of the VPA varies within a spectrum of magnitude to phase shift transform functions, with the transform functions illustrated in FIG. 76 representing the boundaries of this spectrum. This is shown in FIG. 77, which illustrates a spectrum of magnitude to phase shift transform functions corresponding to a range of amplifier classes of operation of the VPA output stage. FIG. 77 illustrates 6 functions corresponding to the six amplifier classes of operation A, AB, B, C, D, and S. In general, however, an infinite number of functions can be generated using the functions corresponding to the two extreme classes of operation A and S. In an embodiment, this is performed using a weighted sum of the two functions and is given by (1−K)×R(θ)+K×SQ(θ), with 0≦K≦1.
6. Additional MISO Design Concepts
6.1) Implementing Boolean Logic Functions Using MISO Power Amplifiers
In FIGS. 51D-F described above, various MISO power amplifier (PA) embodiments have been provided. In particular, various embodiments have been provided to illustrate how, for example, a two-input single-output PA can be used as a building block to create multiple-input single-output PAs. Further, various npn, pnp, complementary npn-pnp, NMOS, PMOS, and complementary NMOS-PMOS implementations were described. In this section, additional MISO design concepts are provided. In particular, these concepts illustrate how a MISO PA can be designed to operate in switching mode as a digital logic function, including for example a NOR, OR, NAND, or AND logic function, depending on the system requirements of the particular implementation/apparatus using the MISO PA. Implementation of other logic functions will be apparent to persons skilled in the art based on the teachings provided herein.
As described above, in embodiments, MISO PAs provide simultaneous amplification and combination of two or more phase varying substantially constant envelope signals. In certain modes of operation, the MISO transistors are biased into a non-linear switch mode. In such mode, the MISO PA provides a basic logic function, which can be described using Boolean algebra, in addition to simultaneous amplification and combination of signals. This additional functionality of MISO PAs is further described below.
FIG. 79 illustrates an example MISO power amplifier configuration 7900, which can be operated as a Boolean NOR function according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 79, MISO configuration 7900 includes two collector-coupled NPN transistors 7902 and 7904. Inputs IN1 and IN2 are provided respectively by the base terminals of transistors 7902 and 7904. The output terminal of MISO configuration 7900 is provided by the common collector node of transistors 7902 and 7904. Typically, a pull-up impedance (not shown in FIG. 79) couples the common collector node of transistors 7902 and 7904 to a power supply. As would be understood by a person skilled in the art based on the teachings herein, MISO configuration 7900 can be equivalently implemented using other types of transistors, including for example PNP, NMOS, or PMOS transistors.
According to an embodiment of the present invention, MISO configuration 7900 can be operated to perform a digital NOR gate function. This can be done by driving inputs IN1 and IN2 using pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals, thereby causing MISO transistors 7902 and 7904 to operate in switch mode or class S mode of operation. For example, assuming that inputs IN1 and IN2 are both driven by square waveforms that alternate between a low voltage value (e.g., 0 volts) and a high voltage value (e.g., 5 volts), then the output of MISO configuration 7900 will take the low voltage value when either N1 or IN2 takes the high voltage value and will take the high voltage value when both IN1 and IN2 take the low voltage value. More generally, the output of MISO configuration 7900 will be a logic low when either of IN1 and IN2 is a logic high and a logic high when both IN1 and IN2 are a logic low. This is equivalent to a NOR function which logic table is illustrated by table 7906 of FIG. 79.
FIG. 80 illustrates an example MISO power amplifier configuration 8000, which can be operated as a Boolean OR function according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 80, MISO configuration 8000 includes two emitter-coupled NPN transistors 8002 and 8004. Inputs IN1 and IN2 are provided respectively by the base terminals of transistors 8002 and 8004. The output terminal of MISO configuration 8000 is provided by the common emitter node of transistors 8002 and 8004. Typically, a pull-down impedance (not shown in FIG. 80) couples the common emitter node of transistors 8002 and 8004 to ground. As would be understood by a person skilled in the art based on the teachings herein, MISO configuration 8000 can be equivalently implemented using other types of transistors, including for example PNP, NMOS, or PMOS transistors.
According to an embodiment of the present invention, MISO configuration 8000 can be operated to perform a digital OR gate function. This can be done by driving inputs IN1 and IN2 using PWM signals, thereby causing MISO transistors 8002 and 8004 to operate in switch mode or class S mode of operation. For example, assuming that inputs IN1 and IN2 are both driven by square waveforms that alternate between a low voltage value (e.g., 0 volts) and a high voltage value (e.g., 5 volts), then the output of MISO configuration 8000 will take the low voltage value when both IN1 and IN2 take the low voltage value and will take the high voltage value when either IN1 or IN2 take the high voltage value. More generally, the output of MISO configuration 8000 will be a logic low when both IN1 and IN2 are a logic low and a logic high when either IN1 or IN2 is a logic high. This is equivalent to an OR function which logic table is illustrated by table 8006 of FIG. 80.
FIG. 81 illustrates an example MISO power amplifier configuration 8100, which can be operated as a Boolean NAND function according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 81, MISO configuration 8100 includes two collector-coupled NPN transistors 8102 and 8106 and two emitter-coupled transistors 8104 and 8108. Further, the emitters of transistors 8102 and 8106 are respectively coupled to the collectors of transistors 8104 and 8108. In addition, transistors 8102 and 8104 have common base terminals with transistors 8108 and 8106, respectively. Inputs IN1 and IN2 are provided respectively by the base terminals of transistors 8102/8108 and 8104/8106. The output terminal of MISO configuration 8100 is provided by the common collector node of transistors 8102 and 8106. Typically, a pull-up impedance (not shown in FIG. 81) couples the common collector node of transistors 8102 and 8106 to a power supply. As would be understood by a person skilled in the art based on the teachings herein, MISO configuration 8100 can be equivalently implemented using other types of transistors, including for example PNP, NMOS, or PMOS transistors.
According to an embodiment of the present invention, MISO configuration 8100 can be operated to perform a digital NAND gate function. This can be done by driving inputs IN1 and IN2 using PWM signals, thereby causing MISO transistors 8102, 8104, 8106, and 8108 to operate in switch mode or class S mode of operation. For example, assuming that inputs IN1 and IN2 are both driven by square waveforms that alternate between a low voltage value (e.g., 0 volts) and a high voltage value (e.g., 5 volts), then the output of MISO configuration 8100 will take the low voltage value when both IN1 and IN2 take the high voltage value and will take the high voltage value when either IN1 or IN2 take the low voltage value. More generally, the output of MISO configuration 8100 will be a logic low when both IN1 and IN2 are a logic high and a logic high when either IN1 or IN2 is a logic low. This is equivalent to an NAND function which logic table is illustrated by table 8110 of FIG. 81.
FIG. 82 illustrates an example MISO power amplifier configuration 8200, which can be operated as a Boolean AND function according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 82, MISO configuration 8200 includes two collector-coupled NPN transistors 8202 and 8206 and two emitter-coupled transistors 8204 and 8208. Further, the emitters of transistors 8202 and 8206 are respectively coupled to the collectors of transistors 8204 and 8208. In addition, transistors 8202 and 8204 have common base terminals with transistors 8208 and 8206, respectively. Inputs IN1 and IN2 are provided respectively by the base terminals of transistors 8202/8208 and 8204/8206. The output terminal of MISO configuration 8200 is provided by the common emitter node of transistors 8204 and 8208. Typically, a pull-down impedance (not shown in FIG. 82) couples the common emitter node of transistors 8204 and 8208 to ground. As would be understood by a person skilled in the art based on the teachings herein, MISO configuration 8100 can be equivalently implemented using other types of transistors, including for example PNP, NMOS, or PMOS transistors.
According to an embodiment of the present invention, MISO configuration 8200 can be operated to perform a digital AND gate function. This can be done by driving inputs IN1 and IN2 using PWM signals, thereby causing MISO transistors 8202, 8204, 8206, and 8208 to operate in switch mode or class S mode of operation. For example, assuming that inputs IN1 and IN2 are both driven by square waveforms that alternate between a low voltage value (e.g., 0 volts) and a high voltage value (e.g., 5 volts), then the output of MISO configuration 8200 will take the low voltage value when either IN1 or IN2 takes the low voltage value and will take the high voltage value when both IN1 and IN2 take the high voltage value. More generally, the output of MISO configuration 8200 will be a logic low when either IN1 or IN2 is a logic low and a logic high when both IN1 and IN2 are a logic high. This is equivalent to an AND function which logic table is illustrated by table 8210 of FIG. 82.
FIGS. 79-83 above show how different MISO power amplifier configurations can be used to perform basic Boolean logic functions, including for example, NOR, OR, NAND, and AND functions. In addition, as described above, the different MISO configurations can be used to perform power amplification functions, including simultaneous amplification and combination of two or more phase varying substantially constant envelope signals to generate a desired RF output signal. However, while the different MISO configurations perform similar RF output signal generation and power amplification functions, they may have different operation characteristics. This is further explored below with reference to FIGS. 83-91, which illustrate a comparison between MISO configuration 7900 which performs a NOR function and MISO configuration 8100 that performs a NAND function.
FIG. 83 illustrates an example simulation test bench 8300 of MISO power amplifier configuration 7900 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
For ease of illustration, example test bench 8300 uses switches to model MISO transistors 7902 and 7904. For example, switch 8302 may correspond to MISO transistor 7902 of MISO configuration 7900. Similarly, switch 8304 may correspond to MISO transistor 7904 of MISO configuration 7900. Accordingly, input terminals 8306 and 8308 of test bench 8300 correspond respectively to inputs IN1 and IN2 of MISO configuration 7900.
As described above, the common collector node of MISO transistors 7902 and 7904 is coupled to a power supply via a pull-up impedance. In test bench 8300, this is modeled using a pull-up resistor 8318 and a 3V DC power supply 8310. A current probe 8320 is also coupled between power supply 8310 and resistor 8318 to measure the output current of the MISO configuration.
Node 8312 provides the output terminal of the MISO configuration simulated in test bench 8300. Accordingly, node 8312 corresponds to the output terminal of MISO configuration 7900. Further, when input terminals 8306 and 8308 are driven by PWM input signals, the waveform at node 8312 is a two-level PWM signal that relates to the input signals according to NOR logic table 7906 of FIG. 79.
In an embodiment, when MISO configuration 7900 is used to perform power amplification functions in addition to performing a digital NOR function, the PWM output signal of MISO configuration 7900 can be input into an optional bandpass filter to generate a continuous multi-level waveform output. The bandpass filter filters the pulses of the input PWM signal to generate analog values proportional thereto. In test bench 8300, this is modeled using bandpass filter 8314, which receives the output 8312 of the simulated MISO configuration and generates RF output signal 8316. RF output signal 8316 is a power amplified signal which results from the simultaneous amplification and combination of the input signals driving input terminals 8306 and 8308.
FIG. 84 illustrates an example simulation test bench 8400 of MISO power amplifier configuration 8100 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
For ease of illustration, example test bench 8400 uses switches to model MISO transistors 8102, 8104, 8106, and 8108. For example, switches 8402, 8404, 8406, and 8408 in test bench 8400 may correspond respectively to MISO transistors 8102, 8104, 8106, and 8108 of MISO configuration 8100. Accordingly, input terminals 8410 and 8412 of test bench 8400 correspond respectively to inputs IN1 and IN2 of MISO configuration 8100.
As described above, the common collector node of MISO transistors 8102 and 8106 is coupled to a power supply via a pull-up impedance. In test bench 8400, this is modeled using a pull-up resistor 8418 and a 3V DC power supply 8414. A current probe 8416 is also coupled between power supply 8414 and resistor 8418 to measure the output current of the MISO configuration.
Node 8420 provides the output terminal of the MISO configuration simulated in test bench 8400. Accordingly, node 8420 corresponds to the output terminal of MISO configuration 8100. Further, when input terminals 8410 and 8412 are driven by PWM input signals, the waveform at node 8420 is a two-level PWM signal that relates to the input signals according to NAND logic table 8110 of FIG. 81.
In an embodiment, when MISO configuration 8100 is used to perform power amplification functions in addition to performing a digital NAND function, the PWM output signal of MISO configuration 8100 can be input into an optional bandpass filter to generate a continuous multi-level waveform output. The bandpass filter filters the pulses of the input PWM signal to generate analog values proportional thereto. In test bench 8400, this is modeled using bandpass filter 8422, which receives the output 8420 of the simulated MISO configuration and generates RF output signal 8424. In an embodiment, RF output signal 8424 is a power amplified signal which results from the simultaneous amplification and combination of the input signals driving input terminals 8410 and 8412.
FIGS. 85-87 to be described below illustrate that MISO configuration embodiments 7900 and 8100, while performing different Boolean logic functions in class S mode, perform substantially similar amplification functions when provided the same driving input signals. For the purpose of this comparison, it is not necessary that the MISO configurations are operated in class S mode, although the comparison may be done with the MISO configurations operated in class S mode.
FIG. 85 illustrates example upper branch and lower branch input signals provided to the MISO power amplifier configuration simulated in test bench 8300. In particular, the waveform shown in red corresponds to the upper branch input signal, and the waveform shown in blue corresponds to the lower branch input signal. As shown in FIG. 85, the upper branch and lower branch input signals are substantially constant envelope sine wave signals which vary in phase from 0 to 180 degrees relative to each other.
Note that to operate the MISO configuration in class S mode, the upper branch and lower branch input signals need to be two-level PWM signals. Such signals can be generated from the sine waveforms shown in FIG. 85 by passing the sine waveforms through a bandpass modulator (e.g., Delta-Sigma Modulator) followed by a pre-amplifier to generate continuous-time PWM signals.
FIG. 86 illustrates example upper branch and lower branch input signals provided to the MISO power amplifier configuration simulated in test bench 8400. In particular, the waveform shown in red corresponds to the upper branch input signal, and the waveform shown in blue corresponds to the lower branch input signal. As shown in FIG. 86, the upper branch and lower branch input signals are substantially constant envelope sine wave signals which vary in phase from 0 to 180 degrees relative to each other.
Note that the upper branch and lower branch input signals shown in FIG. 85 are substantially similar to the upper branch and lower branch input signals shown in FIG. 86. However, the two sets of waveforms are shown at different zoom levels in FIGS. 85 and 86.
FIG. 87 illustrates example output waveforms generated by the MISO power amplifier configurations simulated in test benches 8300 and 8400. In particular, waveform 8702 is the RF output of the MISO configuration simulated in test bench 8400 in response to the input signals shown in FIG. 86. Waveform 8704 is the RF output of the MISO configuration simulated in test bench 8300 in response to the input signals shown in FIG. 85.
As noted above, the two example MISO configurations perform different Boolean functions in class S mode. However, as can be seen from FIG. 87, the two MISO configurations have substantially similar RF output waveforms in response to substantially similar input signals. Accordingly, the two MISO configurations perform substantially similar RF output signal generation and power amplification functions, but can be operated to perform different Boolean logic functions. This, as would be understood by a person skilled in the art based on the teachings herein, applies not only to a NOR MISO configuration and a NAND MISO configuration, but to any two different MISO configurations as described above. For example, an OR MISO configuration and an AND MISO configuration also perform substantially similar RF output signal generation and power amplification functions but different Boolean logic functions.
Nonetheless, any two MISO configurations as described above, while performing substantially similar RF output signal generation and power amplification functions, have different operation characteristics. These characteristics, depending on the implementation and/or system requirements, can be an important factor to consider in deciding which MISO configuration to employ in a particular system design. This is further explored in FIGS. 88-91, which illustrate that while MISO configurations 7900 and 8100 perform substantially similar RF output signal generation and power amplification functions, they have different operation characteristics, including different output power capabilities, output current, and efficiency characteristics.
FIG. 88 illustrates example plots of power output versus outphasing angle for the MISO power amplifier configurations simulated in FIGS. 83 and 84. In particular, curves 8802 and 8804 represent respectively the normalized equivalent power output versus the outphasing angle (i.e., phase shift angle between the input signals driving the MISO configuration) for the NOR MISO configuration simulated in test bench 8300 and the NAND MISO configuration simulated in test bench 8400.
As shown in FIG. 88, the NAND MISO configuration has slightly less power output than the NOR MISO configuration for a given outphasing angle value. This is due to the fact that a NAND MISO configuration (e.g., MISO configuration 8100) has two transistors in series between the RF output and ground compared to a single transistor between the RF output and ground in a NOR MISO configuration (e.g., MISO configuration 7900), which results in lower output voltage in the NAND MISO configuration assuming equal voltage power supplies are used for both configurations.
Note, however, that, apart from the NAND MISO configuration having slightly lower power output than the NOR MISO configuration, the two configurations have substantially similar power output transfer functions versus the outphasing angle. Indeed, as shown in FIG. 88, curves 8802 and 8804 appear to have substantially similar shapes, albeit curve 8804 is slightly lower than curve 8802. Further, note that despite having slightly different power outputs, the NOR MISO configuration and the NAND MISO configuration generate, given same inputs, substantially similar RF output waveforms as described above.
However, the NOR MISO configuration and the NAND MISO configuration have different output current characteristics, which result in different power efficiency characteristics. This makes the two configurations suitable for different implementations and/or system requirements. This is further explored below with reference to FIGS. 89-91.
FIG. 89 illustrates example plots of output current versus outphasing angle for the MISO power amplifier configurations simulated in FIGS. 83 and 84. In particular, curves 8902 and 8904 represent respectively the mean output current versus the outphasing angle (i.e., phase shift angle between the input signals driving the MISO configuration) for the NOR MISO configuration simulated in test bench 8300 and the NAND MISO configuration simulated in test bench 8400. Note that the output current herein refers to the current that passes through the output node of the MISO configuration.
As shown in FIG. 89, although the NOR MISO and the NAND MISO configurations generate substantially similar output responses, their output current characteristics are significantly different due to their different circuit topologies. Indeed, as shown by curve 8902, the output current of the NOR MISO configuration increases with increases in outphasing angle. In contrast, the output current of the NAND MISO configuration decreases with increases in outphasing angle.
For the NOR MISO configuration, the output current behavior shown in FIG. 89 is explained as follows. At 0 degrees of outphasing angle, the class S output of the MISO configuration is a PWM signal with 50% duty cycle. When the outphasing angle is increased, the class S output becomes a PWM signal with shorter width pulses, with the output reaching 0% duty cycle at 180 degrees of outphasing angle. However, while the duty cycle decreases with increasing outphasing angle, the output node is more frequently being coupled to ground, drawing more current from the power supply. For example, at 0% duty cycle, the input signals into the NOR MISO configuration are 180 degrees out of phase relative to each other. Referring to NOR MISO configuration 7900, for example, this means that at any time at least one of transistors 7902 and 7904 is ON, coupling the output node to ground. As such, while the output of the MISO configuration is zero, the MISO configuration is drawing maximum current from the power supply. As described above, according to an embodiment of the present invention, such scenario can be avoided by using bias and/or control signals to prevent the MISO amplifier from drawing current when the output is zero.
For the NAND MISO configuration, the exact opposite of what is described above for the NOR MISO configuration occurs. In other words, when the outphasing angle is increased, the class S output becomes a PWM signal with larger width pulses, with the output reaching 100% duty cycle at 180 degrees of outphasing. However, as the duty cycle increases with increasing outphasing angle, the output node is less frequently being coupled to ground, drawing less current from the power supply. For example, at 100% duty cycle, the input signals into the NAND MISO configuration are 180 degrees out of phase relative to each other. Referring to NAND MISO configuration 8100, for example, this means that at any time at least one of transistors 8102 and 8104 is OFF and at least one of transistors 8106 and 8108 is OFF. Accordingly, the output node of MISO configuration 8100 can never be coupled to ground at 180 degrees of outphasing, resulting in zero output current being drawn from the power supply as shown by curve 8904.
For further illustration, FIG. 90 illustrates example plots of power output and output current versus outphasing angle for the MISO power amplifiers simulated in FIGS. 83 and 84. In particular, plot 9002 shows the power output (curve 9004) and the output current (curve 9006) versus the outphasing angle for the NAND MISO configuration simulated in test bench 8400. Similarly, plot 9004 shows the power output (curve 9010) and the output current (curve 9012) versus the outphasing angle for the NOR MISO configuration simulated in test bench 8300. As shown in plot 9002, the power output varies in the same direction as the output current in the NAND MISO configuration with changes in outphasing angle. In contrast, as shown in plot 9008, the power output varies in opposite direction as the output current in the NOR MISO configuration with changes in outphasing angle.
Circuit topology differences between the NOR MISO and the NAND MISO configurations extend not only to output current characteristics but also to power efficiency characteristics. FIG. 91 illustrates example plots of normalized efficiency versus outphasing angle for the MISO power amplifiers simulated in FIGS. 83 and 84. In particular, curve 9102 represents the normalized efficiency curve versus the outphasing angle for the NAND MISO configuration simulated in test bench 8400. Curve 9104 represents the normalized efficiency versus the outphasing angle for the NOR MISO configuration simulated in test bench 8300.
As shown in FIG. 91, curves 9102 and 9104 intersect at 0 degrees of outphasing angle, which indicates that at 0 degrees of outphasing the NAND MISO configuration and the NOR MISO configuration have equal power efficiency. This is illustrated by marker “ml” in FIG. 91, which shows that at 0 degrees of outphasing, the efficiency of either configuration is approximately 71%.
When the outphasing angle increases, however, the efficiency of the NOR MISO configuration begins to drop immediately. In contrast, the efficiency of the NAND MISO configuration increases between 0 and  ̃25 degrees of outphasing angle, before starting to drop with further increases of outphasing angle. Throughout the outphasing angle range, however, the efficiency of the NAND MISO configuration remains considerably higher than the efficiency of the NOR MISO configuration. For example, as illustrated by markers “m2” and “m3” in FIG. 91, at 55 degrees of outphasing, the efficiency of the NAND MISO configuration is approximately 57%, whereas the efficiency of the NOR MISO configuration is approximately 15%.
It is noted that in the above, it is assumed that the MISO configurations are operated without any additional bias and/or control signals, which, as described in previous sections, may be used to affect the output current and/or the power efficiency of a MISO configuration.
Accordingly, in the above, different MISO power amplifier configurations have been described. The different MISO configurations can be operated to perform different Boolean logic functions. At the same time, the different MISO configurations have substantially similar RF output signal generation and power amplification functions, including substantially similar output power transfer functions versus the outphasing angle. Yet, the different MISO configurations can have different output current and/or power efficiency characteristics.
As such, depending on the implementation and/or system requirements, different MISO configurations may be selected. Such requirements may include, for example, power supply requirements, output power requirements, available bias control functions, the amount of time spent in switch mode operation, the type of transistors (e.g., NPN, PNP, nFET, pFET, pHEMT, MOSFET, MESFET, CMOS, etc.) available, and the available functional domains such as digital, analog, or both. For example, when power supply requirements are stringent and a large output power dynamic range is desired, a NOR MISO configuration may be more suitable than a NAND MISO configuration. In contrast, when power efficiency is a concern and no bias control functions are available, a NAND MISO configuration may be better to use than a NOR MISO configuration.
6.2) Combined Polar-VPA Architectures
In this section, example combined polar-VPA architectures are provided. These architectures illustrate how VPAs according to embodiments of the present invention can be combined with polar architecture amplifiers to create additional functionality. For example, a polar amplifier design that supports certain output waveforms may be supplemented with a VPA to support additional waveforms that the VPA supports.
According to embodiments of the present invention, combined polar-VPA architectures can be operated in polar, polar plus VPA, or VPA only mode. In an embodiment, the operational mode selected for a combined polar-VPA architecture may be based on but not limited to the required output waveforms (e.g., GSM, EDGE, W-CDMA, CDMA 2000, HSUPA, HSDPA, OFDM, WiMax, or WiBro). The combination approach may also be selected based on calibration requirements and/or production testing requirements.
FIG. 92 illustrates an example combined polar-VPA architecture 9200 according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 92, the combined polar-VPA architecture 9200 includes a polar component 9202 and a VPA component 9204. As described above, the VPA component 9204 includes such elements as vector modulators, interpolation filters, pre-drivers, drivers, and MISO power amplifiers. Further, VPA component 9204 may receive bias and/or control signals as described in previous sections above.
In an embodiment, the VPA may also receive a digitally controller power supply (DCPS) signal or a switching modulated power supply (SMPS) signal, which can be used to control the amplitude of the output signal generated by the VPA. Note that the bandwidth of the DCPS or SMPS in a polar design without a VPA must be greater than the output signal bandwidth in order to reproduce the amplitude component of the output signal correctly. This increased high current power supply bandwidth directly affects the in-band and out-of-band noise performance of the system, the overall efficiency of the system, and the sideband or ACPR/ACLR (Adjacent Channel Power Ratio/Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio) performance of the system.
Fortunately, in other embodiments, because the VPA can control both the phase and the amplitude of the output using substantially constant envelope signals, the DCPS or the SMPS can be eliminated. Note that eliminating the DCPS or SMPS and relying instead on VPA controls to generate the correct output signal amplitude has two main advantages. First, a polar-VPA architecture has the advantage of not requiring time alignment between the amplitude and phase signal paths as is required in polar only designs. Second, using a VPA in combination with a polar design eliminates the need for high DCPS or SMPS bandwidths, which enables the combination architecture to be used in more applications.
FIG. 93 illustrates another example combined polar-VPA architecture 9300 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Combined polar-VPA architecture 9300 includes a polar component 9302 and a VPA component 9304. VPA component 9304 includes such elements as vector modulators, interpolation filters, pre-drivers, drivers, and MISO power amplifiers. In addition, VPA component 9304 receives various bias and/or control signals, which create several control layers for controlling the phase and amplitude of the VPA. As such, the DCPS signal in architecture 9300 can be eliminated as described above.
According to embodiments of the present invention, various controls can be used to achieve a require range of amplitude control without controlling the supply voltage to the MISO amplifier (i.e., eliminating the DCPS or SMPS supplies). In an embodiment, amplitude control is achieved by controlling the vector modulators of the VPA component and/or by controlling the bias of the MISO amplifier. In another embodiment, amplitude control is performed by controlling the vector modulators, the MISO bias, and/or the MISO input gain control. In a further embodiment, amplitude control is performed by controlling the vector modulators, the MISO bias, the MISO input gain control, and/or by MISO input pulse density modulation (PDM). The latter type of control is illustrated in FIG. 94, which shows an example VPA component 9400, which can be used in a combined polar-VPA architecture according to an embodiment of the present invention.
VPA component 9400 includes such elements as vectors modulators, interpolation filters, pre-drivers, drivers, and MISO power amplifiers. In addition, as shown in FIG. 94, VPA component 9400 includes a pair of pulse density modulators 9402 and 9404. Pulse density modulators 9402 and 9404 are coupled between the vector modulator and the amplification stages in the upper and lower branches of the VPA, respectively. In an embodiment, pulse density modulators 9402 and 9404 receive a pulse density control signal 9406 and perform PDM on the outputs of the vector modulators according to pulse density control signal 9406 to vary the amplitude of the output signal of the MISO amplifier.
7. Summary
Mathematical basis for a new concept related to processing signals to provide power amplification and up-conversion is provided herein. These new concepts permit arbitrary waveforms to be constructed from sums of waveforms which are substantially constant envelope in nature. Desired output signals and waveforms may be constructed from substantially constant envelope constituent signals which can be created from the knowledge of the complex envelope of the desired output signal. Constituent signals are summed using new, unique, and novel techniques not available commercially, not taught or found in literature or related art. Furthermore, the blend of various techniques and circuits provided in the disclosure provide unique aspects of the invention which permits superior linearity, power added efficiency, monolithic implementation and low cost when compared to current offerings. In addition, embodiments of the invention are inherently less sensitive to process and temperature variations. Certain embodiments include the use of multiple input single output amplifiers described herein.
Embodiments of the invention can be implemented by a blend of hardware, software and firmware. Both digital and analog techniques can be used with or without microprocessors and DSP's.
Embodiments of the invention can be implemented for communications systems and electronics in general. In addition, and without limitation, mechanics, electro mechanics, electro optics, and fluid mechanics can make use of the same principles for efficiently amplifying and transducing signals.
8. Conclusion
The present invention has been described above with the aid of functional building blocks illustrating the performance of specified functions and relationships thereof. The boundaries of these functional building blocks have been arbitrarily defined herein for the convenience of the description. Alternate boundaries can be defined so long as the specified functions and relationships thereof are appropriately performed. Any such alternate boundaries are thus within the scope and spirit of the claimed invention. One skilled in the art will recognize that these functional building blocks can be implemented by discrete components, application specific integrated circuits, processors executing appropriate software and the like and combinations thereof.
While various embodiments of the present invention have been described above, it should be understood that they have been presented by way of example only, and not limitation. Thus, the breadth and scope of the present invention should not be limited by any of the above-described exemplary embodiments, but should be defined only in accordance with the following claims and their equivalents.

## Claims

1. A method of amplifier class control, comprising:
determining a desired class of operation of an amplifier based on a power level of an output waveform;
operating the amplifier in the desired class of operation by biasing the amplifier into a non-linear switch mode;
determining a modified class of operation based on a change in the power level of the output waveform; and
operating the amplifier in the modified class of operation.

2. The method of claim 1, wherein the amplifier comprises a multiple input single output (MISO) amplifier.

3. The method of claim 1, wherein the desired class of operation is determined such that a power efficiency is optimized for the power level of the output waveform.

4. The method of claim 1, wherein the desired class of operation is determined such that a linearity of the amplifier is optimized for power level of the output waveform.

5. The method of claim 1, wherein the power level of the output waveform is an instantaneous power level.

6. The method of claim 5, wherein the instantaneous power level is determined as a function of a desired output waveform envelope.

7. The method of claim 1, wherein the power level of the output waveform is an average power level.

8. The method of claim 1, wherein the desired class of operation is determined based on a desired type of output waveform.

9. The method of claim 1, wherein operating the amplifier in the modified class of operation comprises biasing the amplifier in a modified non-linear switch mode.

10. The method of claim 1, further comprising controlling a phase of the output waveform based on the desired class of operation or the modified class of operation.

11. An apparatus, comprising:
an amplifier; and
an amplifier controller configured to:
determine a desired class of operation of an amplifier based on a power level of an output waveform,
operate the amplifier in the desired class of operation by biasing the amplifier into a non-linear switch mode,
determine a modified class of operation based on a change in the power level of the output waveform, and
operate the amplifier in the modified class of operation.

12. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein the amplifier comprises a multiple input single output (MISO) amplifier.

13. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein the desired class of operation is determined such that a power efficiency is optimized for the power level of the output waveform.

14. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein the desired class of operation is determined such that a linearity of the amplifier is optimized for power level of the output waveform.

15. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein the power level of the output waveform is an instantaneous power level.

16. The apparatus of claim 15, wherein the instantaneous power level is determined as a function of a desired output waveform envelope.

17. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein the power level of the output waveform is an average power level.

18. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein the desired class of operation is determined based on a desired type of output waveform.

19. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein the amplifier controller is configured to operate the amplifier in the modified class of operation by biasing the amplifier in a modified non-linear switch mode.

20. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein the amplifier controller is further configured to control a phase of the output waveform based on the desired class of operation or the modified class of operation.